133
UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso di Laurea Magistrale in Linguistica TESI DI LAUREA Towards an Italian VerbNet: a descriptive analysis of argument alternations. Candidata: Relatore: Veronica Viola Prof. Alessandro Lenci Correlatore: Prof. essa Giovanna Marotta Esperto Esterno: Dott. Gianluca Lebani ANNO ACCADEMICO 2012-2013

UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  • Upload
    others

  • View
    6

  • Download
    0

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA

Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso di Laurea Magistrale in Linguistica

TESI DI LAUREA

Towards an Italian VerbNet: a descriptive analysis of argument alternations.

Candidata: Relatore: Veronica Viola Prof. Alessandro Lenci Correlatore: Prof. essa Giovanna Marotta Esperto Esterno: Dott. Gianluca Lebani

ANNO ACCADEMICO 2012-2013

 

 

 

Page 2: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  2  

 

 

 

“In  the  world  “out  there,”  there  are  no  verbs,  no  speech  events,  and  no  adjacency  pairs.  

There   are   particles   of   matter   moving   around   in   certain   recurrent   and   yet   not   fully  

predictable   patterns.  We   interpret   such   experiences   as   and   through   symbolic   means,  

including  linguistic  expressions.  That’s  what  it  means  to  be  human.”  

 

(Alessandro  Duranti)  

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

To  Emmet,  for  standing  by  my  side  while  I  face  the  daily  challenges  of  being  human.      

     

 

                                   

Page 3: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  3  

Contents  

 

Contents  .........................................................................................................................................  3  

Introduction  ..................................................................................................................................  5  

Chapter  1.  Analysing  verbs  at  the  syntax-­‐semantics  interface  ....................................  7  

1.1.    The  necessity  of  an  integrated  syntactic-­‐semantic  framework  .........................  7  

1.2.  Lexical  semantic  representation  ................................................................................  10  

1.2.1.  The  meaning-­‐based  approach  ..............................................................................................  12  

1.2.2  Aktionsart:  Vendler’s  verb  classes  .......................................................................................  13  

1.2.3  Verb  valency  and  argument  structure  ...............................................................................  16  

1.2.4  Fillmore’s  case  frames  and  Thematic  Roles  .....................................................................  20  

1.2.5  From  verb  meaning  to  the  underlying  event  structures  ............................................  26  

Chapter  2.  VerbNet:  a  verb  classification  based  on  argument  alternations  .........  29  

2.1.  Argument  Alternations:  what  they  are  and  why  they  matter  ...........................  29  

2.1.2.  Traditional  argument  alternations  .....................................................................................  31  

2.1.3.  Event  Composition  ....................................................................................................................  33  

2.2.  Verb  classes  ........................................................................................................................  35  

2.3.  VerbNet:  a  computational  verb  lexicon  for  English  ..............................................  36  

Chapter  3.  Towards  a  classification  of  argument  alternations  in  Italian  ..............  40  

3.1.  Subcategorisation  frames  for  a  sample  of  Italian  verbs  .....................................  40  

3.1.1.  Resources  .......................................................................................................................................  40  

3.1.2.  Carving  verbs  subcategorisation  frames  .........................................................................  43  

3.2.  Data  extraction  .................................................................................................................  45  

3.2.1.  Automatic  extraction  of  argument  alternation  candidates  ......................................  46  

3.2.2.  Manual  identification  of  Italian  frame  alternations  ....................................................  47  

Chapter  4.  A  descriptive  analysis  of  argument  alternations  in  Italian  ..................  48  

4.1.  Alternations  that  involve  argumental  sentences  ..................................................  48  

4.1.1.  Alternations  involving  argumental  sentences  in  a  complement  position  .........  49  

4.1.2.  Alternations  involving  argumental  sentences  in  the  subject  position  ................  59  

4.2.  Alternations  that  involve  noun  or  prepositional  phrases  (NP  or  PP)  ............  62  

4.2.1.  Alternations  causing  a  change  in  the  transitivity  of  the  verbs  ...............................  63  

4.2.2.  Alternations  involving  two  intransitive  variants  .........................................................  79  

4.2.3.  Alternations  involving  verbs  with  predicative  complements  .................................  82  

Page 4: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  4  

4.3.  Alternations  involving  an  argumental  sentence  and  a  phrase  complement  

(NP  or  PP)  ...................................................................................................................................  83  

4.3.1.  Alternations  affecting  a  complement  position  ..............................................................  83  

4.3.2.  Alternations  taking  place  in  the  subject  position  .........................................................  94  

4.3.3.  Alternations  requiring  predicative  complements  ........................................................  96  

Conclusions  ................................................................................................................................  99  

Acknowledgments  .................................................................................................................  105  

Bibliography  ............................................................................................................................  107  

APPENDIXES  .............................................................................................................................  116  

APPENDIX  A  –  List  of  Subcategorisation  Frames  in  Il  Sabatini  &  Coletti  (2012)

 ......................................................................................................................................................  116  

APPENDIX  B  –  List  of  the  1000  Top  Frequent  Italian  Verbs  Analysed  in  our  

Sample  (see  CD-­‐ROM)  ...........................................................................................................  117  

APPENDIX  C  –  List  of  Subcategorisation  Frames  identified  in  the  annotation  

procedure  .................................................................................................................................  118  

APPENDIX  D  –  Argumental  Sentence  Alternations  .....................................................  124  

APPENDIX  E  –  Alternations  involving  Noun  or  Prepositional  Phrases  (NP  or  PP)

 ......................................................................................................................................................  127  

APPENDIX  F  –  Alternations  involving  an  argumental  sentence  and  a  phrase  

complement  (NP  or  NP)  .......................................................................................................  130  

 

Page 5: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  5  

Introduction  

 

In  this  thesis  we  explore  the  linguistic  phenomenon  known  as  “argument  alternations”  

(Levin  &  Rappaport  2005)  in  relation  to  Italian.  Given  its  widespread  diffusion  in  natural  

languages   and   the   intellectual   challenges   it   encourages,   the   study   of   this   particular  

aspect  has  interested  all  researchers  involved  in  both  syntax  and  semantics,  regardless  

of  the  theoretical  framework  in  which  they  place  their  work.    

  Unfortunately,   as   is   the   case   with   many   other   linguistic   phenomena,   the   vast  

majority   of   the   research   conducted   so   far   on   argument   alternation   has   concentrated  

almost  exclusively  on  English,  paying  very  little  or  no  attention  at  all  to  other  languages  

(DeLancey  1995;  Guerssel  et  al.  1985).    

In   relation   to   Italian,   argument   alternations   have   been   the   object   of   dedicated  

research   only   in   the   last   decade   and   quite   sporadically;   also,   most   of   the   time,   these  

works   focus  only  on   few  specific  different  alternations  (Cennamo  (forthcoming);   Jezek  

2003;  Lenci  2009;  Lenci   (in  press)),  while   a   complete  and  detailed   classification  of   all  

the  ones  allowed  in  Italian,  comparable  to  that  available  for  English  (Levin  1993),  is  still  

lacking.    

This   thesis   represents   a   first   attempt   to   fill   this   gap,   providing   a   descriptive  

analysis  of  argument  alternations  in  Italian  based  on  a  sample  of  the  1000  top  frequent  

Italian  verbs,  derived  from  a  lexicographic  resource  and  manually  annotated,  and  semi-­‐

automatically  extracted.  

In  Chapter  1  we  outline  a  brief  history  of   the  major  theories  of   lexical  semantic  

representation,   highlighting   their   strong   points,   but   also   the   issues   that   each   of   them  

inevitably   raises   and   the   problems   they   left   unsolved.   We   also   argue   in   favour   of   a  

theoretical   framework   that   should   embrace   syntax   and   semantics   at   once,   as  

demonstrated   by   the   inherent   incompleteness   and   poor   predictive   power   of   all   those  

approaches  that  have  focused  on  only  one  of  these  linguistic  levels  of  investigation.  

          In   Chapter   2   we   present   the   phenomenon   investigated   in   this   thesis,   namely  

“argument   alternations”,   which   we   describe   with   a   specific   focus   on   the   theoretical  

challenges   they   posit,   particularly   in   relation   to   two   of   the   most   recent   and   debated  

contributions  in  the  field,  put  forward  by  Roland  &  Jurafsky  (2002)  and  Beavers  (2006)  

respectively.    In  order  to  provide  the  most  complete  framework  possible,  we  also  briefly  

explore  a  similar  and  equally  intellectually  demanding  phenomenon,  commonly  referred  

Page 6: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  6  

to   as   “event   composition”.   Lastly,   we   describe   VerbNet   (Kipper   et   al.   2000;   Kipper-­‐

Sculer  2005),  the  computational  lexical  resource  available  for  English  that  not  only  has  

proven   to   be   extremely   valuable   in   both   linguistics   and   Natural   Language   Processing  

(NLP)  research,  but  that  has  also  inspired  this  work.  

  In  Chapter  3  we   show   the  methodology  used   to,   on  one  hand,   collect   our  data,  

illustrating  in  detail  the  lexical  resources  exploited  (Il  Sabatini  &  Coletti  2012;  Lenci  et  al.  

2012)   and   the   annotation   procedure,   and,   on   the   other,   to   semi-­‐automatically   extract  

what  we  had  set  out  to  investigate,  namely  argument  alternations  in  Italian.    

  In   Chapter   4   we   provide   a   descriptive   analysis   of   our   findings,   describing   in  

depth  each  and  every  alternation  we  found:  for  most  of  them,  we  also  attempt  a  first  and  

necessarily   partial   semantic   classification   of   Italian   verbs,   mainly   following   Levin’s  

(1993),  but  also  proposing  novel  classes  when  it  was  felt  that  none  of  the  ones  available  

in  her  seminal  work  were  compatible  with  our  verbs.  Moreover,  it  was  thought  best  to  

divide  our  results  into  three  major  groups,  according  to  the  type  of  argument  realisation  

allowed  by  each  alternation,  which  could  consist  of:  1)  two  argumental  sentences,  2)  two  

noun   or   prepositional   phrases,   and   3)   an   argumental   sentence   and   a   noun   or  

prepositional  phrase.  

Hence,  in  order  to  build  an  Italian  VerbNet,  the  necessary  first  step  to  undertake  

was   the   investigation   and   the   consequent   identification   of   argument   alternations  

allowed  by   Italian   verbs,   and   this   is   exactly  what  we   tried   to   achieve  with   this   thesis.  

Moreover,   taking   into   consideration   the   complexity   of   the   linguistic   phenomenon   we  

explored  and  the  difficulties  intrinsic  to  such  an  ambitious  purpose,  it  is  worth  stressing  

that  the  semantic  classification  proposed  is  only  a  first  attempt  to  organise  Italian  verbs  

and  future  research  will  most  certainly  have  to  focus  on  this  aspect.    

These   necessary   premises   notwithstanding,   we   hope   that   this   work   will  

encourage  the  Italian  research  community,  and  whosoever  would   like  to  conduct  their  

work  on  Italian  verbs,  to  carry  out  further  research  on  argument  alternations  in  Italian,  

not   only   extending   the   sample   we   used,   but   also   basing   the   analysis   on   sources   of  

information  different  from  the  ones  we  exploited.  In  fact,  it  is  only  with  the  collection  of  

more  corpus-­‐based  evidence  that  the  claims  made  in  this  thesis  could  be  fully  validated  

for  Italian.      

 

 

Page 7: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  7  

Chapter  1  

Analysing  verbs  at  the  syntax-­‐semantics  interface  

   

1.1.    The  necessity  of  an  integrated  syntactic-­‐semantic  framework    

 

The   study   of   meaning   in   language,   known   as   semantics,   has   interested   the   greatest  

thinkers  and  philosophers   for  a  very   long  time,  deeply   fascinated  and   intrigued  by  the  

unique   ability   of  mankind   to   interpret   the  world   around   them  and   express   it   through  

words.  However,  it  was  not  until  the  second  half  of  the  last  century  that  semantics  truly  

became  a  central  aspect  in  the  description  of  the  language  faculty  proposed  not  within  

philosophical  traditions,  but  within  proper  linguistic  frameworks  (Berruto  1976;  Cann,  

Kempson  &  Gregoromichelaki  2009).    

  In  modern  linguistics,  the  interest  in  the  way  words  represent  meaning,  or  lexical  

semantics,   can   be   traced   back   to   Ferdinand   de   Saussure   (Geeraerts   2010),   whose  

intuitions  have  resulted  in  the  so-­‐called  “structural  semantics”,  a  branch  of  the  broader  

approach   known   as   “structural   linguistics”.   In   particular,   De   Saussure   (1916)   put  

forward  a  model  according  to  which  a  linguistic  sign  or  unit  is  a  double  entity  consisting  

of   a   signifier   (its   phonic   component   realised   as   a   sequence   of   either   graphemes   or  

phonemes)   and   a   signified   (the  mental   image   evoked   by   the   signifier),   distinguishing  

thus   between   form   and   substance   (De   Saussure   1916,   pp   97-­‐100).   In   an   attempt   to  

provide  semantics  with  a   formal  and  rigorous  descriptive  apparatus,  Saussure’s  model  

was  first  developed  by  Hjelmslev  (1957),  who  not  only  renamed  signifier  and  signified  as  

expression  plane  and  content  plane  respectively,  but  also  proposed  for  the  first  time  ever  

to   adapt   the   analysis   in   distinctive   features   and   phonemes   used   in   phonetics   to  

semantics,   introducing   the   semantic   features   (Hjelmslev   1961).   This   theoretical  

framework  was  subsequently  enriched  by  the  work  of  Greimas  (1966),  who  applied  to  

semantic  analysis   the  specular  terms  seme   (the  smallest  unit  of  meaning  recognisable)  

and  sememe  (a  semantic  unit  made  up  by  the  combination  of  two  or  more  semes).    

  This  interest  for  lexical  semantics  as  a  main  topic  of  linguistic  research  was  partly  

overshadowed  by   the  advent  of   the   transformational-­‐generative  model,   considered  by  

many  “the  most  radical  and  important  change  in  direction  in  descriptive  linguistics  and  

in   linguistic   theory   that   has   taken   place   in   recent   years”   (Robins   1967,   p.   226).   This  

approach   was   inaugurated   in   1957   with   the   publication   of   Chomsky’s   Syntactic  

Page 8: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  8  

Structures   and   became   the   dominant   theoretical  model   in   linguistics  when  his   second  

main   work,   Aspects   of   the   Theory   of   Syntax,   was   published   in   1965.   As   the   titles   of  

Chomsky’s  seminal  works  themselves  would  suggest,  his  original  theory  was  built  on  the  

premise   that   syntax   was   the   core   component   (or   module:   see   Fodor   1983)   of   the  

language  faculty  and  that  the  analysis  of  syntactic  behaviour  in  different  languages  was  

the  key  to  understanding  it,  thus  giving  very  little  prominence  to  other  linguistic  levels  

such  as  lexicon.    

As   a   partial   reaction   to   the  wide   spread   of   Chomsky’s  model,   since   the   1970s,  

over   the  past   forty  years  we  have  witnessed  a   shift   in   the  general   focus  of   theoretical  

linguistics,   from   merely   looking   at   how   words   can   and   do   combine   with   each   other  

(syntax)   to   the   study   of   how   actual   meaning   is   represented   in   those   words   (lexical  

semantics),  giving  rise  to  many  different  theoretical  frameworks  which  have  since  been  

put   forward,  such  as  Lexical  Functional  Grammar   (Bresnan  1982),  Functional  Grammar  

(Dik  1978,  1989,  1997;  Vossen  1995;  Olbertz  et  al.  1998),  Role  and  Reference  Grammar  

(van   Valin   &   Foley   1984)   and   the   Generative   Lexicon   (Pustejovsky   1995).   Moreover,  

notwithstanding   the   syntax-­‐centered   nature   of   the   generative   school,   generative  

linguists   themselves   begun   to   take   lexicon   more   seriously   in   the   light   of   the   newly  

collected   evidence,   and   Chomsky   himself   presented   a   revised   version   of   his   theory   in  

which  semantics  was  finally  incorporated  and  its  key  role  in  understanding  the  nature  of  

the  language  faculty  recognised  (Chomsky  1981).  

It  is  precisely  in  this  renovated  interest  for  semantics  that  one  must  place  all  the  

attempts  made  to  study  and  understand  verbal  behaviour.  The  category  of  verbs  has  in  

fact  drawn  attention  since  ever  and  Plato  himself  viewed  verbs  as  one  of  the  “two  kinds  

of   vocal   indication   of   being”   (Plato   1921,   261.e),   along   with   nouns,   underlying   how  

linguistic  meaning  does  not  truly  emerge:    

 Theaet.  “In  what  way?”  

 Str.  “  For  instance,  “walks”,  “runs”,  “sleeps”,  and  the  other  verbs  which  denote  action,   even   if   you   utter   all   there   are   of   them   in   succession,   do   not   make  discourse  for  all  that.”    Theaet.  “No,  of  course  not.”    Str.  “And  again,  when  “lion”,  “stag”,  “horse”,  and  all  other  names  of  those  who  perform  these  actions  are  uttered,  such  a  succession  of  words  not  yet  make  discourse;  for  in  neither  case  do  the  words  uttered  indicate  action  or  inaction  

Page 9: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  9  

or   existence   of   anything   that   exists   or   does   not   exist,   until   the   verbs   are  mingled  with   the  nouns;   then  the  words   fit,  and  their   first  combination   is  a  sentence,  about  the  first  and  shortest  form  of  discourse”    

[Plato  1921,  262b-­‐c]      

It   is  worth  stressing  how   this  passage  of  Plato’s  Sophist  seems   to  have  anticipated   the  

field  of  research  known  today  as  “linguistic  interfaces”,  by  which  we  commonly  refer  “to  

the   informational  connections  and  communication  among  putative  modules  within  the  

grammar”  (Rachmand  &  Reiss  2007,  p.  2):  this  new  approach  has  been  proving  so  fertile  

and   successful   for   the   understanding   of   the   architecture   of   language   that   it   does   not  

come   as   a   surprise   that,   in   recent   years,   a   significant   part   of   the   most   intellectually  

engaging  and  challenging  research  has  come  precisely  from  the  study  of  interfaces.  

Amongst   the   many   possible   interfaces,   the   syntax-­‐semantics   one   has   received  

great  attention,  and  for  obvious  reasons:  not  only  it  bridges  a  gap  which  for  so  long  was  

considered  unbridgeable,   but   it   also  deals  with   one  of   the  most   intriguing   facts   about  

language,   namely   the   rising   of   meaning   through   the   combination   of   lexical   items,  

primarily  that  of  verbs  and  nouns,  as  Plato’s  aforementioned  quote  stresses.    

Hence,  linguists  have  been  facing  the  difficult  task  of  elaborating  models  of  lexical  

representation  that  would  encompass  both  semantic  and  syntactic  aspects  at  once,  and,  

even  though  the  theoretical  frameworks  so  far  proposed  vary  substantially  in  relation  to  

one  other,  they  all  agree  on  the  key  role  of  verbs  and  of  the  mechanisms  through  which  

they  project  their  lexical  information  onto  the  nouns  they  combine  with:  an  apparently  

basic   yet   fundamental   linguistic  match,  which  has  been  defined  –and   rightly   so   –   “the  

backbone  of  language  and  thought”  (Moro  2012,  p.  20).  

It   has   long   been   known   that   every   single   verb   “evokes   a   certain   number   of  

elements   in   respect   to   which   something   is   predicated”   (Jezek   2003,   p.   18):   these  

elements  commonly  go  under  the  name  of  arguments  and  they  are  syntactic  realisations  

of   the   lexical-­‐semantic   information   that   each   and   every   verb   carries.     The   operations  

through  which  this  information  is  passed  from  the  semantic  level  onto  the  syntactic  one  

is   an   issue  known   in   linguistics   as  mapping,   and   the   analysis   of   the  possible   syntactic  

expressions  of  a  verb’s  arguments  is  called  argument  realisation:  

 

(1)   a.  Leslie  swept  

  b.  *Kelly  broke  [Levin  &  Rappaport  Hovav    1998,  p.  102]  

Page 10: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  10  

As  the  examples  in  (1)  shows,  a  verb  like  to  sweep  is  grammatically  acceptable  with  only  

one  argument  (the  subject),  even  in  the  absence  of  any  context,  whereas  a  verb  like  to  

break   is   not,   unless   we   add   a   second   argument   (the   object)   that   must   be   always  

syntactically  realised:  

   

(2)   Kelly  broke  the  dishes/the  glasses/her  finger/the  TV    

 

Because  of   its   inherently   twofold  nature,   this  area  of   linguistics  has  appealed   to  many  

scholars   and   researchers,   who   turned   it   into   the   leading   field   for   the   study   of   the  

interaction  between  the  syntactic  level  and  the  semantic  one.  

In   fact,   as   we   briefly   mentioned   above,   “since   the   1980s,   many   theories   of  

grammar  have  been  built  on  the  assumption  that  the  syntactic  realisation  of  arguments  

–   their   category   type   and   their   grammatical   function   –   is   largely  predictable   from   the  

meaning  of  their  verbs”  (Levin  &  Rappaport  Hovav  2005,  p.  7),  which  means  that  every  

theoretical   model   of   argument   realisation   has   to   feature   at   least   a   theory   of   lexical  

semantic  representations  of  verbs  and,  moreover,  a  theory  of  how  these  representations  

are  mapped  onto  the  relevant  syntactic  representations.    

 

1.2.  Lexical  semantic  representation  

 

If  there  is  a  general  agreement  on  interpreting  the  semantic  representation  of  verbs  as  

articulated  in  different  levels  (also  called  structures1),  there  is  definitely  less  agreement  

on  which   are   the   levels,   how  many   of   them   there   are   and   how   semantic   information  

distributes  among  them.  In  fact,  once  we  have  established  that  “the  semantic  content  of  

a   lexical   entry   determines   to   a   large   extent   its   syntactic   contexts   of   occurrence   or  

subcategorization  properties2”   (Koening  &  Davis   2006,   p.   71),   and   that   this   “semantic  

content”  is  organized  at  different  levels,  we  still  have  to  determine  which  facets  of  a  verb  

meaning  influence  and,  at  the  same  time,  limit  its  syntactic  structure.    

Since   verbs   are,   like   any   other   lexical   items,   linguistic   symbols   that   codify  

complex  events  happening  in  the  world,  it  is  easily  understandable  why  they  should,  and  

indeed   do,   display   an   equally   complex   set   of   semantic   properties.   However,   as  

                                                                                                               1  See  2.3,  2.4  and  2.5  for  the  description  of  the  different  structures.  2  See  2.3.1.  and  2.3.2.    

Page 11: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  11  

crosslinguistic  differences   show,  not   all   of   these  properties  play   a   role   in  determining  

the   syntactic   realisation  of   verbs  and   their   arguments,   therefore   leading  us   to   assume  

that  “there  is  a  set  of  semantic  elements  and  relations  that  is  much  smaller  than  the  set  

of   cognitively   available   and   culturally   salient   distinctions,   and   verb   meanings   are  

organised  around  them”  (Pinker  1989,  p.  166).  According  to  this  view  then,  it  seems  to  

be   more   accurate   to   interpret   verbs   as   predicate   of   events,   rather   than   as   events  

themselves,  namely  as  complex  happenings  in  the  world  decomposable  into  the  smaller  

and  delimited  phases  of  which  they  consist  (subatomic  semantic  decomposition  of  events;  

see  Parsons  1990,  Arsenijević  et  al.  2013).  

 Also,   this  assumption  about  verbs  allows  us  to   fully  understand  why   languages  

vary   greatly   in   relation   to   argument   structure:   in   each   and   every   one   of   them,   verbs  

exhibit   an   idiosyncratic   sensibility   only   to   a   selected   subset   of   the   wide   range   of  

semantic   features   associated   with   the   event   they   describe,   making   every   language   a  

unique  depiction  of  the  world  (Steiner  1975).  

Hence,  following  Levin  &  Rappaport  (2005),  we  believe  that  only  those  aspects  of  

meaning  that  determine  argument  realisation  must  be   included   in   the   lexical  semantic  

representation  of  verbs,  whereas  all  the  others,  being  irrelevant  for  the  set  purpose,  can  

be  left  out.    

Consequently,   in  providing  verbs  with  a  proper   lexical   semantic   representation  

one  should  first  analyse  verbs  and  their  syntactic  realisations,  trying  to  divide  them  into  

classes  accordingly  to  their  behaviour.  Then,  one  should  carefully  look  at  the  semantics  

of   those   verbs   that   fall   into   the   same   group,   seeking   out   the   underlying   semantic  

properties   that   can   be   held   responsible   for   their   common   argument   realisation.   The  

outcome  of  this  thorough  analysis  should  be  the  identification  of  verbs  semantic  classes  

present  in  a  given  language.    

However,   as   soon   as   many   different   -­‐   yet   all   seemingly   plausible   -­‐   semantic  

parameters   arose   as   means   to   classify   verbs,   it   became   clear   that   “the   isolation   of  

meaning   components   appropriate   to   the   characterisation   of   verbs   in   a   particular  

semantic   class   presents   a   real   challenge”   (Levin  &  Rappaport  Hovav  2005,   p.   15),   the  

failure  of  which  can  not  only  compromise   the   results,  but  also  bring   into  question   the  

reliability  of  the  methodology  itself  employed  to  obtain  them.  

     

Page 12: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  12  

In   the   next   paragraphs   we   briefly   illustrate   the   main   approaches   so   far   put  

forward   to   organise   verbs   into   different   classes.   Given   the   scope   and   purpose   of   this  

thesis  we   thought   it   best   to   give  more   space   and  pay  more   attention   to   those   aspects  

related   to   the   so-­‐called   “argument   structure”   and,   of   course,   to   the  models   based   on  

them:   for   the   sake   of   completeness   we   will   still   present   some   of   the   other   existing  

frameworks,  which,  however,  will  not  be  dealt  with  in  depth  but  only  touched  on.    

 

1.2.1.  The  meaning-­‐based  approach    

 

The  most  basic  and  naïve  verb  classification  is  certainly  the  one  based  on  the  “analysis  of  

the   type   of   event   expressed   by   a   verb   from  a   semantic   point   of   view”   (Jezek   2005,   p.  

107)   namely   its   denotative   meaning3,   which   is   also   responsible   for   the   so-­‐called  

“prototypical  meaning”  of  verbs  (and  also  nouns).  This  is  precisely  the  basic  and  broad  

meaning  conveyed  by  any  given   lexical   item  and   that,  even   in   the  case  of  polysemy  or  

figurative  language,  can  still  be  identified  as  the  typical  semantic  content  of  that  specific  

word.  According  to  this  parameter,  verbs  naturally  fall  into  various  categories,  such  as:    

 

-­‐ movement   verbs   (to   walk,   to   run,   to   stroll)   /   verbi   di   movimento   (camminare,  

correre,  passeggiare);    

-­‐ perception  verbs   (to  hear,   to  see,   to  smell)  /  verbi  di  percezione   (sentire,  vedere,  

annusare);  

-­‐ throwing   verbs   (to   throw,   to   toss,   to   hurl)   /   verbi   di   lancio   (buttare,   gettare,  

scagliare).  

 

Even   though   this   way   of   classifying   verbs   is   clear-­‐cut   and   theoretically   plausible,   as  

extensively  discussed  above,   the  semantics  of  verbs   is  more  complex   than   this  and,  as  

further   empirical   research   demonstrated,   there   is   much   more   to   verbs   and   verbal  

behaviour  than  just  “knowledge  of  idiosyncratic  word-­‐specific  properties”  (Levin  1993,  

p.  1).    

 

                                                                                                               3  “Denotation.  The  relation  between  a  lexical  unit  and  whatever  objects,  etc.  it  is  used  to  refer  to.  E.g.   bull   denotes   (in   one   account   of   its   meaning)   a   class   of   animals,   brown   a   property   of  individuals  or  objects,  etc.”  (Matthews  2007,  p.  97).  

Page 13: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  13  

1.2.2  Aktionsart:  Vendler’s  verb  classes    

 

A   different   way   of   classifying   verbs   is   based   on   a   semantic   parameter   known   as  

Aktionsart.  Even  though  its  first  use  dates  back  to  the  beginning  of  the  XX  century  (Agrell  

1908),   it   was   not   until   the   publication   of   Vendler’s   famous   article   Verbs   and   Times  

(1957)  that  this  level  of  verb  meaning  became  widely  known  and  used.    

The   German   term  Aktionsart   is   commonly   translated   into   English  with   the   phrase  

“lexical   aspect”   and,   in   this   framework,   it   refers   to   “different   ways   of   viewing   the  

internal  temporal  constituency  of  a  situation”  (Comrie  1976,  p.  3).  As  we  already  argued,  

verbs   are   lexical   items   that   describe   structured   events:   since   every   happening   in   the  

world  necessarily  takes  place  over  the  course  of  a  more  or   less  defined  length  of  time,  

looking  at  how  the  unfolding  through  time  is  represented  by  every  verb  can  cast  some  

light  on  its  syntactic  behaviour.      

Vendler   bases   his   analysis   of   verbs   behaviour   on   a   parameter   that   he   calls   “time  

schemata”,  indicating  with  it  the  internal  temporal  structure  of  a  verb,  regardless  of  any  

other   time-­‐point   that   may   refer   to   an   external   situation.   According   to   this   semantic  

property  then,  four  different  classes  can  be  individuated,  which  are  believed  to  refer  to  

as  many  types  of  events:    

 

1. States  (or  statives):  to  believe,  to  own,  to  exist,  etc.;  

2. Activities:  to  cook,  to  dance,  to  study,  etc.;    

3. Accomplishments:  to  build,  to  heal,  to  cut;  

4. Achievements:    to  find,  to  become,  to  lose.  

 

Not   only   do   they   differ   in   relation   to   which   tenses   they   allow   and   which   temporal  

modifiers  they  can  be  paired  with,  but  they  also  present  different  logical  implications.    

Stative  verbs  typically  go  on  for  a  certain  period  of  time,  during  which  the  event  

described   does   not   show   any  modification   or   any   further   decomposition   into   smaller  

sub-­‐phases.  Activity   verbs  have   certain  duration,   just   like  States,   but   contrary   to   them  

they   can   be   analysed   as   a   sequence   of   different   stages,   all   of   which   are   equally   true.  

Accomplishment  verbs  have  duration,  just  like  the  previous  two  classes,  but  they  “have  a  

climax,  which  has  to  be  reached  if  the  action  is  to  be  what  it  is  claimed  to  be”  (Vendler  

1957,  p.  145).    

Page 14: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  14  

If   verbs   normally   ascribed   to   the   three   classes   presented   so   far   all   share   the  

durativity   element,   those   belonging   to   the   fourth   one   do   not:   Achievement   verbs  

typically   describe   so-­‐called   punctual   events,   namely   those   events   whose   inherent  

temporal  endpoint  consist  of  just  one  short  phase  that  corresponds  to  an  instantaneous  

culmination,  and  before  which  there  is  no  preparation  phase.  

Vendler’s   time   schemata   have   thus   been   interpreted   as   an   internal   temporal  

structure  articulated  in  binary  aspectual  features,  the  combination  of  which  determines  

to  which   class   a   verb   belongs   (Fig.   1).   Traditionally,   there   are   three   types:   durativity,  

dynamicity   and   telicity4.   The   first   one   draws   a   fine   line   between   events   that   happen  

overtime   and   events   that   are   perceived   as   instantaneous;   the   second   distinguishes  

dynamic  events  -­‐  typically  processes  -­‐  from  states;  the  third  is  the  least  intuitive  one  and  

it  describes  events  that  tend  towards  a  completion,  the  reaching  of  which  is  essential  in  

order  to  consider  the  action  completed  (telic),   in  opposition  to  those  that  do  not  imply  

such  an  internal  final  point  (atelic).  

 

  DURATIVITY   DYNAMICITY   TELICITY  

States   +   -­‐   -­‐  

Activities   +   +   -­‐  

Accomplishments   +   +   +  

Achievements   -­‐   +   +    

Table  1:  Combination  of  aspectual  features  in  Vendler's  classification    

As  briefly  mentioned  above,  the  most  striking  fact  about  these  features  –  which  is  also  

what   has   made   them   so   widely   used–   is   that   they   only   allow   for   specific   syntactic  

structures,  the  presence  of  which  in  a  given  class  can  then  be  inferred  by  looking  at  its  

characteristic  features.    

Durative   and  dynamic   verbs   (Activities   and  Accomplishments)   allow   continuous  

tenses  (“I  am  running”,  “She  is  cutting  the  bread”),  whereas  the  lack  of  just  one  of  these  

two  features  (States  and  Achievements)  is  enough  for  a  verb  to  not  have  such  a  structure  

(*“I  am  owing  two  houses”,  *“He  is  finding  the  keys”).  Moreover,  atelic  predicates  (States  

and  Activities)  can  be  paired  with  the  adverbial  phrase  “for  x  time”  (“He  was  in  college  

                                                                                                               4  These  three  are  the  most  widely  known  and  used,  but  not  the  only  ones;  some  models  include  other  aspects,  such  as:  iterativity,  ingressivity,  egressivity,  and  so  on.  

Page 15: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  15  

for   two   years”,   “   We   cooked   for   an   hour”),   while   telic   ones   (Accomplishments   and  

Achievements)  can’t  (*“They  built  a  bridge  for  three  months”,  *“We  found  the  hotel  for  a  

day”).  Lastly,  only  durative,  dynamic  and  telic  verbs  (Accomplishments)  can  appear  with  

the  phrase  “in  x  time”  (“The  wound  healed  in  a  week”),  and  only  non-­‐durative,  dynamic  

and  telic  verbs  (Achievements)  are  compatible  with  the  phrase  “at  time  x”  (“You  arrived  

at  4PM”).  Vice  versa,  the  possibility  for  a  verb  to  exhibit  a  certain  syntactic  behaviour  is  

taken  as  a  test  to  establish  whether  a  verb  belongs  to  a  class  or  not  (Fig.  1).  

 

 Figure  1:  Syntactic  tests  for  Vendler's  verb  classes  [  Jezek  2003,  p.  33]  

 

Given   the   analysis   we   propose   in   this   thesis,   it   is   important   to   stress   the   value   of  

actionality   for   the  consequences   it  bares   in   relation   to   syntactic  valency.   In  particular,  

the   presence   of   the   telicity   feature   seems   to   be   responsible   for   the   possibility   of  

intransitive   Activity   verbs   (3a)   to   become   transitive   Accomplishment   verbs   (3b),   by  

means  of  introducing  a  direct  object  and,  therefore,  of  effecting  the  syntactic  valence  of  

the  verbs  in  question:  

 

(3)   a.  Chiara  sings  /  Chiara  canta    

  b.  Chiara  sings  a  cake  /  Chiara  canta  una  canzone          

 

Furthermore,   it   is   worth   mentioning   that   a   significant   application   of   Vendler’s  

classification  is  that  conducted  by  Bertinetto  for  Italian  (1986):  even  though  it  is  limited  

to  the  indicative  mood,  it  is  still  today  an  invaluable  piece  of  work  and,  by  far,  the  most  

complete  and  thorough  actionality-­‐based  analysis  of  the  Italian  verb  system.        

After  Vendler’s  classification,   the  most  renowned  contribution   in  the  description  of  

verb  behaviour  based  on  aspectual  properties  was  that  of  Dowty  (1979),  who  proposed  

a  representation  of  the  four  classes  established  by  Vendler  expressed  through  the  aid  of  

Page 16: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  16  

logical   terms.  These   “logical   terms”   consist  of   the   following   three   semantic  primitives,  

namely  semantic  basic  concepts  that  are  innately  understood,  but  cannot  be  expressed  

in  simpler  terms:  

 

1. BECOME:  it  indicates  inchoativity,  which  is  the  instantiation  of  a  change  of  state  

taken  to  be  spontaneous  and  not  attributable  to  a  specific  agentive  entity;  

2. DO:  it  reflects  agentivity,  namely  the  firm  intention  of  a  specific  entity  to  act  on  a  

certain  situation  or  other  entity;  

3. CAUSE:   it   establishes  a   causal   relation  between   two  otherwise   separate  events,  

which  are  put  into  correlation  by  either  a  spontaneous  or  an  intentional  event.  

 

When   these   primitives   are   applied   to   what   Dowty   considers   “atom   predicates”   that  

cannot  be  further  decomposed,  namely  Statives,  they  give  rise  to  the  other  three  classes  

of   verbs   and   the   processes   through   which   they   emerge   are   called   by   Dowty   “logical  

structures”  (Dowty  1979).  So,  for  instance,  a  typical  achievement  verb  such  as  to  die,  can  

be  analysed  as  ‘(BECOME)  dead  (x)’,  which  means  that  “the  entity  (x)  has  undergone  a  

change  of  state  that  has  led  it  to  now  be  dead”.    

 

1.2.3  Verb  valency  and  argument  structure  

 

A   third  way  of   studying   verbs   and   their   syntactic   behaviour   is   based  on   the   semantic  

level   now   known   as   “argument   structure”,   which   was   first   proposed   by   Tesnière  

(1959)5.      

According  to  this  framework  –  and  the  ones  which  followed  –,  every  sentence  is  

built   around   a   verb,   which,   just   like   an   atom   with   its   surrounding   sub-­‐particles,   is  

capable   of   exerting   a   force   upon   a   variable   number   of   phrasal   elements,   called   first  

“actants”,   then  “arguments”,  and  defined  as   “les  personnes  ou  choses  qui  participent  à  

un  degré  quelconque  au  procès”  (Tesnière  1959,  p.  105).  Also,  the  traditional  concept  of  

“government”   or   “rection”   is   replaced  with   that   of   “valence”   or   “verb   valency”,   clearly  

derived  from  the  definition  and  use  of  this  term  in  chemistry.  

                                                                                                               5  Other   models   based   on   this   semantic   level   are   Grimshaw   (1990)   and   Lazard’s     “actantial  model”  (1994).    

Page 17: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  17  

Thus,  depending  on  the  number  of  arguments  that  a  verb  needs   in  order   for   its  

meaning  to  be  fully  realised,  four  classes  of  verbs  have  been  identified6:  

 

1. Avalent  verbs  (0  arguments):  “It7  rains  a  lot”;  

2. Monovalent  verbs  (1  argument):  “She1  has  aged”;  

3. Divalent  verbs  (2  arguments):  "The  mother1  hugged  the  little  boy2”;  

4. Trivalent  verbs  (3  arguments):  “He1  showed  us2  the  house3”.  

 

However,  calculating  the  valence  of  a  verb  proved  to  be  not  as  straightforward  as  it  may  

seem  at  first  sight.  

As  Tesnière  himself  noted,  a  verb  can  also  be  accompanied  by  phrasal  elements,  

known   as   adjuncts,   that   are   not   its   arguments   but   still   express   “les   circonstances   de  

temps,  lieu,  manière,  etc.  dans  lesquelles  se  déroule  le  procès”  (Tesnière  1959,  p.  102),  

as  seen  in  the  following  examples:  

 

(3)   a.  My  dad  left  on  Tuesday  

b.  I  met  my  friend  Julian  the  other  day  in  a  nice  café  in  town  

 

Moreover,   under   particular   circumstances   certain   verbs   can   leave   one   of   their  

arguments  syntactically  unexpressed,  which  is  therefore  said  to  be  optional:  

 

(4)   a.  “My  boss  takes  ages  to  park  [his  car/motorbike/van/etc.  >  vehicles]  

b.  “Amanda  has  finally  come  back  [home/to  work/etc.  >  places]  

 

As   one   can   assume   from   these   sentences,   these   verbs   have   two   equally   possible   and  

acceptable   syntactic   structures,   depending   on   the   presence   or   not   of   one   of   their  

arguments  (precisely  those  in  italics).    

                                                                                                               6  A  fifth  class  of  tetravalent  verbs  (4  arguments:  “They  moved  the  couch  from  the  sitting  room  to  the   bedroom”)   has   been   proposed,   but   the   debate   is   still   quite   far   from   being   settled   (Jezek  2005).    7  Here,   “it”   is  what   is  normally  called  a   “dummy  subject”,  namely  a  mere  syntactic  placeholder  used   in  non-­‐pro-­‐drop   languages,  such  as  English,  when  the  argument  of  a  verb   is  semantically  nonexistent  and  has  no  real  reference,  but  it  is  still  syntactically  required.  In  pro-­‐drop  languages,  such  as  Italian,  avalent  verbs  have  in  fact  no  subject  at  all  (*“Il  cielo  piove”).    

Page 18: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  18  

Another  case   is  that  of  verbs   like  to  cut,   the  meaning  of  which  semantically  and  

logically  implies  the  use  of  a  sharp  manageable  tool;  however,  the  argument  that  should  

refer   to   it   is  actually  never  syntactically   realised,  as  demonstrated  by   the  sentences   in  

(5):  

 

(5)   a.  “My  brother  always  cuts  the  bread  [with  a  knife]”  

b.  “The  hairdresser  cut  my  hair  nicely  [with  a  pair  of  scissors]”        

 

Such  arguments  are  referred  to  as  default  arguments  (Pustejovsky  1995,  p.  63).    

A  similar  yet  slightly  different  case  is  that  of  verbs  like  to  brush,  whose  meaning  

already  incorporates  one  of  its  arguments:  it  differs  from  the  previous  scenario  because,  

in  order  for  this  argument  to  be  syntactically  expressed,  it  needs  to  be  further  specified:  

 

(6)   a.  *“My  mum  always  brushed  my  hair  with  the  brush”  

b.  “My  mum  always  brushed  my  hair  with  my  favourite  Barbie’s  brush”  

 

Such  arguments  commonly  go  under  the  name  of  shadow  arguments  (Pustejovsky  1995,  

p.  63).  

The  examples  discussed  above  show  that  “if  it  is  true  that  the  scene  elicited  by  a  

verb  evokes  a  certain  number  of  elements  in  relation  to  which  something  is  ‘predicated’,  

it  is  just  as  true  that  these  such  elements  are  not  all  equally  and  necessary  realised  at  the  

syntax  level”  (Jezek  2003,  p.  18).  This  striking  evidence  inevitably  led  to  a  much-­‐needed  

distinction   between   syntactic   valence,   which   refers   to   the   pattern   of   syntactically  

necessary   arguments   of   a   verb   –   else   the   sentence   is   ungrammatical   –   and   semantic  

valence,  which  corresponds  to  the  set  of  all  the  arguments  implied  by  a  verb  at  a  logical  

level.  

 

Selectional  restrictions    

Once   the  number  of  arguments   that  a  verb  needs   to  create  well-­‐formed  sentences  has  

been   established,   it   is   necessary   to   validate   their   semantic   content.   If   it   is   true   that  

predicates   select   their   arguments   in   terms   of   numbers,   it   is   equally   as   true   that,  

precisely  because  of  their  meaning,  they  also  constrain  them  in  terms  of  semantics.    

Page 19: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  19  

Even  though  the  first  to  systematically  note  that  co-­‐occurring  words  always  show  

some   relations   of   semantic   context   was   Porzig   (1934),   we   owe   the   first   extensive  

discussion   about   selectional   restrictions   to   Chomsky,   who   talks   about   “strict  

subcategorisation   rules”   on   one   hand,   and   “selectional   rules”   on   the   other   (Chomsky  

1965).   The   latter   is   precisely  what  we   commonly   refer   to   as   semantic-­‐selection   (or   s-­‐

selection:  Chomsky  1986),  and   it   is  responsible   for  the  restrictions  between  predicates  

and  the  semantic  type  of  their  complements.    

As   for   how   to   represent   these   restrictions   and   the   semantic   content   of   the  

arguments   they   allow,   since   the   work   of   Hjelmslev   (1961)   within   the   structural  

theoretical   framework,   linguists   have   adapted   the   formalism   of   binary   semantic  

features,  which  is  briefly  illustrated  in  the  examples  in  (7):  

 

(7)   a.  to  eat  (2  arguments):  [+  animate]  _  [+edible];    

b.  to  sleep  (1  argument):  [+  animate].  

 

This   aspect   of   argument   structure   is   fundamental   for  whoever  wishes   to   undertake   a  

complete   analysis   of   verbs   because   it   shows   how   sentences   can   be   syntactically  well-­‐

formed,   therefore   grammatical,   but   still   thoroughly   unacceptable   for   any   speaker   of   a  

given   language,   since   they   entail   a   violation   of   a   semantic   restriction.   Once   again,  

Chomsky  gave  a  brilliant  example  of   this  when  he  drew  a  distinction  between  the  two  

following  sentences:  

 

(8)   a.  “Colourless  green  ideas  sleep  furiously”’  

b.  *“Furiously  sleep  ideas  green  colourless”  

 

As   a   matter   of   fact,   he   simply   noticed   that   (8a)   “though   nonsensical,   is   grammatical,  

while  (8b)  is  not  grammatical”  (Chomsky  1957,  p.  15),  which  demonstrates  how  the  two  

levels  in  question,  namely  syntax  and  semantics,  must  be  kept  separated  in  the  study  of  

language  faculty  (see  also  Moro  2006).  

 

 

 

Page 20: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  20  

Subcategorisation  restrictions    

Lastly,   it   is   important   to   note   that   verbs   influence   their   arguments   in   one  more  way,  

namely   through  another   set  of   restrictions   that  work   together  with   the  semantic  ones  

discussed  in  the  previous  paragraph.  This  property  of  verbs   is  called  subcategorisation  

(or   c-­‐selection:   Chomsky   1986)   and   it   “expresses   restrictions   between   predicates   and  

the  syntactic  category  of  their  complements”  (Grimshaw  1979,  p.  279).    

Verbs  can  in  fact  allow  the  same  number  of  arguments,  but  restrict  their  syntactic  

realisation   in   a   different  way.   For   instance,   the   verb   “to   rent”   is   divalent,   just   like   the  

verb   “to   live”:   however,   while   the   former   one   allows   only   a   direct   object   as   second  

argument  (NP),  the  latter  one  requires  the  same  second  argument  to  be  expressed  as  an  

indirect  object,  realised  as  a  prepositional  phrase  (PP).    

Such  evidence  is  clearly  what  prompted  Chomsky  to  recognise  the  necessity  for  a  

verb   (V)   to   be   categorised   “in   terms   of   a   certain   set   of   frames   in   which   V   occurs”  

(Chomsky   1965,   p.   96):     this   set   of   arguments   has   been   thus   called   subcategorisation  

frame  ever  since  and,  along  with  the  set  of  semantic  selectional  restrictions,  it  is  believed  

by  many  linguists  to  be  part  of  the  lexical  entry  of  a  verb  (Grimshaw  1990).  

 

1.2.4  Fillmore’s  case  frames  and  Thematic  Roles  

 

A   considerably   different   way   of   looking   at   arguments   and   their   structure   was   first  

introduced  by  Charles  Fillmore   in  his  seminal  paper  “The  case   for  case”  (1968),  which  

can  indeed  be  considered  the  origin  of  the  modern  interest  in  semantic  role  lists.  

Moving  from  a  syntactical  perspective,  Fillmore’s  focus  is  on  the  transformational  

mechanisms   that  make   it  possible   for   the  deep  structure   (DS)   to   turn   into   the   surface  

structure  (SS)  of  a  language.  Even  though  he  obviously  borrows  the  word  case  from  the  

tradition  of  studies  based  on  such  “case  languages”  as  Latin,  Greek  or  Sanskrit,  he  does  

not  use  it  to  refer  to  grammatical  categories,  but  to  semantic  functions.    

Given  sentences  like  the  following  ones:  

 

(9)   i.  He  hit  the  ball  

ii.  He  received  a  blow  

iii.  He  received  a  gift  

Page 21: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  21  

iv.  He  loves  her  

v.  He  has  black  hair          [Fillmore  1968,  p.  6]  

 

Fillmore  notes  how  the  same  subject  “He”,  thus  realised  in  the  same  syntactic  position,  

takes  part   in   the  actions  described  by   the  verbs   above   in  very  different  ways.  Moving  

from   this   observation,   he   believes   that   such   differences   have   to   be   ascribed   to   the  

semantic   relations   that   each   argument   establishes   with   the   verb.   On   this   account,  

Fillmore  posits  the  existence  of  a  limited  and  presumably  universal  set  of  what  he  calls  

deep   cases8 ,   which   aim   to   represent   precisely   all   the   possible   semantic   relations  

responsible  for  the  heterogeneity  of  argument  realisation.          

The   interesting   aspect   of   Fillmore’s   model   (later   called   case   grammar)   is   that,  

even  though  it  emerged  from  a  strongly  syntactic  tradition,  it  is  based  on  the  assumption  

that  the  argument  structure  of  a  verb  –  namely  its  syntactic  realisation  –  depends  on  the  

deep   cases   associated  with   it   –   namely   a   semantic   relation   –,   and   not   the   other   way  

around.  Every  verb  is  then  identified  with  a  so-­‐called  case  frame  (Fillmore  1968),  which  

is  construed  as  a  configuration  of  its  deep  cases  from  which  one  can  derive  the  argument  

realisation.  

Hence,  according  to  this   framework,  “the   full  combinatory  description  of  a  verb  

would   consist   […]   of   a   pairing   of   a   case   frame  with   the  manner   in  which   the   phrases  

representing  the  individual  cases  are  realized  in  the  syntax”  (Fillmore  2008,  pp.  5-­‐6).  

In   the   following   years,   Fillmore’s   case   grammar   received   so   much   attention   –  

along  with  mixed  reviews  –  that  even  Chomsky,  after  including  the  subsystem  “lexicon”  

as  a  base  of  the  Universal  Grammar  (UG),  postulated  what  he  called  Θ-­‐theory,  namely  a  

set   of   principles   “concerned   with   the   assignment   of   thematic   roles   such   as   agent-­‐of-­‐

action”   (Chomsky   1981,   p.   5).   The   principle   that   bears   particular   relevance   in   this  

context   is   the   θ-­‐criterion,   according   to   which   every   verb   is   bound   to   each   of   its  

arguments  by  a  specific  semantic  relation,  called  θ-­‐role,  assigned  on  the  basis  of  the  θ-­‐

position   it   occupies   in   the   LF   (“Logical   Form”).  Moreover,   the   information   concerning  

this  projection  mechanism  is  coded  in  what  Chomsky  calls  θ-­‐grid,  which  is  thought  to  be  

part  of  the  lexical  entry  of  every  verb  (Chomsky  1981,  pp.  34-­‐36).  So,  for  instance,  in  the  

                                                                                                               8  For   similar   concepts,   see   Gruber   (1965)   and   Jackendoff’s   (1983)   thematic   relations,   and  Davidson’s  (1984)  primitive  notions.  

Page 22: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  22  

following   sentences,  Chomsky   identified   the  θ-­‐positions   in  brackets  and,  depending  on  

the  specific  θ-­‐grid  of  the  verb  in  question,  they  will  be  assigned  a  certain  θ-­‐role:  

 

(10)   a.  [They]  persuaded  [John]  [that  [he]  should  leave]  

  b.  [We]  hold  [that  [these  truths]  are  [self-­‐evident]]  

  c.  [We]  hold  [these  truths]  to  be  [self-­‐evident]]  [Chomsky  1981,  p.  36]  

 

Semantic  Role  lists    

Over   the   past   decades,   many   linguists   have   tried   to   describe   the   semantic   relations  

between   verbs   and   arguments,   usually   formalising   them   in   what   has   been   called   a  

semantic   role   list9,   namely   “a   predetermined   set   of   labels   that   identify   arguments  

according   to   the  semantic   relation   they  bear   to   their  verb”   (Levin  &  Rappaport  Hovav  

2005,  p.  35).  The  following  one  is  a  typical  example  of  what  they  look  like:  

 

a. Agent  (A):  the  instigator  of  the  event;  

b. Counter-­‐Agent  (C):  the  force  or  resistance  against  which  the  action  is  carried  out;  

c. Object  (O)10:  the  entity  that  moves  or  changes  or  whose  position  or  existence  is  in  

consideration;  

d. Result  (R):  the  entity  that  comes  into  existence  as  a  result  of  the  action;  

e. Instrument  (I):  the  stimulus  or  immediate  physical  cause  of  an  event;  

f. Source  (S):  the  place  from  which  something  moves;  

g. Goal  (G):  the  place  to  which  something  moves;  

h. Experiencer   (E):   the   entity   which   receives   or   accepts   or   experiences   or  

undergoes  the  effect  of  an  action.  [Fillmore  1971b,  p.  376]  

 

In   spite   of   the   fact   that  many   semantic   role   lists   have   been   so   far   proposed   (see   also  

Gruber  1965;   Jackendoff  1972,  1976),  as  a  matter  of   fact   they  all  begin   from  the  same  

                                                                                                               9  Semantic  roles  refers  here  to  what  early  accounts  (such  as  the  ones  described  in  the  previous  paragraph)  call  case  frame  (Fillmore  1968),  thematic  roles,  θ-­‐roles  or  theta-­‐grid  (Stowell  1981).  10  The   role   “Object”   in   Fillmore   includes   both   the   semantic   roles   of   “Patient”   and   “Theme”,  distinguished  in  the  majority  of  semantic  role  lists  proposed  afterwards.    

Page 23: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  23  

basic   assumptions:   first,   they   all   see   semantic   roles   as   entities   that   cannot   be  

semantically   analysable;   moreover,   being   predetermined,   they   are   defined  

independently  of  verb  meaning  and,   lastly,  even  though  the   lists  vary   in   terms  of  both  

composition  and  size,  they  are  all  considerably  small.  

Thus,  the  aim  of  a  theory  of  semantic  roles  is  to  identify  a  universally  acceptable  

canon   of   semantic   roles   that   can   be   applied   to   any   argument   of   any   verb:   the  

consequence  of  such  a  goal  is  that  assigning  semantic  roles  is  taken  as  a  means  to  bring  

out   similarities   and   differences   in   verb   meaning   that   are   reflected   in   argument  

realisation.   Therefore,   it   is   possible   to   identify,   for   each   role,   a   natural   class   of  

arguments,  whose  members  not  only  establish   the   same  relation  with   their  verbs,  but  

also  allow  the  same  morphosyntactic  expression.  For   instance,   the  break   class  and   the  

hit   class   examined   by   Fillmore   in  The  Grammar   of  Hitting   and  Breaking   (1970)   show  

specific   morphosyntactic   behaviour,   systematically   shared   by   all   the   members   of   the  

respective  class  (see  Chapter  2,  §1).  In  order  to  explain  the  differences  between  the  two  

types  of  class,  Fillmore  proposes  distinct  semantic  role  lists  for  the  break  verbs  and  the  

hit  verbs,  taken  to  be  responsible  for  the  superficial  syntactic  variances:    

 

(11)   a.  break:  Agent,  Instrument,  Object  

  b.  hit:  Agent,  Instrument,  Place               [Fillmore  1970,  p.  131]  

 

Since   Fillmore’s   breakthrough,   approaches   based   on   semantic   role   lists   have   received  

ample  and,  perhaps,  predictable  criticisms.  

The   first   issue   related   to   such   approaches   concerns   their   basically   syntactic  

nature:   as   noted   by  Ravin   (1990),   the   fact   that   only   the   semantic   aspects   that   have   a  

syntactic  realisation  are  taken  into  account  is  very  limiting  because,  as  discussed  above  

(2.3),   part   of   the   semantic   content   of   a   verb   can   remain   syntactically   unrealised,   but  

undoubtedly   crucial   for   understanding   and   determining   its   actual   syntactic   behaviour  

when  put  in  the  context  of  a  sentence.  A  solution  to  this  issue  was  proposed  by  Dowty  

(1991),   who  maintained   that   semantic   roles   are   not   universal,   but   strictly   defined   in  

relation   to   the   verbs   they   are   selected  by:   every   verb,   in   fact,   influences   the   semantic  

roles   that   it  assigns   to   its  arguments  by  virtue  of  what  Dowty  calls   lexical  entailments,  

thus  claiming  that  “the  implication  follows  from  the  meaning  of  the  predicate  in  question  

Page 24: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  24  

alone”  (Dowty  1991,  p.  552),  originating  then  L-­‐thematic  roles  (Lexical-­‐thematic  roles)  of  

that   particular   verb.   According   to   this   view,   “establishing   what   semantic   role   an  

argument   of   a   verb   bears,   then,   requires   a   careful   examination   of   the  meaning   of   the  

verb   and,   in   particular,   the   identification   of   the   lexical   entailments   which   the   verb  

specifies  for  that  argument”  (Levin  &  Rappaport  Hovav  2005,  p.  39).    

However,   another   problem   that   seems   to   stem   directly   from   this   revised  

approach   is   the   possibility   for  more   semantic   roles   to   emerge   at   a   deeper   analysis   of  

verbs   and   their   argument   realisation,   an   issue   known   as   role   fragmentation,   the  most  

famous  case  of  which  is  that  of  the  role  Agency:  if  Jackendoff  (1983,  p.  179-­‐183)  divides  

it  into  Agent  and  Actor,  and  D.  A.  Cruse  (1973,  pp.  18-­‐21)  split  it  in  four  ways  (Volitive,  

Effective,   Initiative,  Agentive),   Lakoff   (1977,  p.   244)   goes   as   far   as   to  propose   fourteen  

different  Agent  roles,  depending  on  their  supposedly  distinctive  characteristics.  Dowty  

fears   that   the   adoption   of   “finer   categorization   of   roles   to   achieve   certain   distinction”  

might  lead  to  the  inability  to  appreciate  “generalizations  by  not  being  able  to  refer  to  the  

grosser   Agent   category”   (Dowty   1991,   p.   554).   At   the   same   time,   extending   the   same  

semantic  role  to  clearly  different  arguments  is  equally  as  undesirable,  since  they  would  

prove   to  have   little  predictive  power,   consequently   failing   to  appreciate  differences   in  

the  behaviour  of  arguments11  of  various  verbs.    

One  more   issue   concerning   the   interaction   between   the   thematic   level   and   the  

syntactic   level   is   related   to   the  possibility  shown  by  verbs   to  realise,  on  one  hand,   the  

same   thematic   role   in   different   syntactic   fashions   (argument  alternation),   and,   on   the  

other,  different  thematic  roles  with  the  exact  same  argument,  as  respectively  illustrated  

in  (12)  and  (13):  

 

(12)   a.  “HeAg  gave  the  moneyTh  to  MaryRec”  b.  “HeAg  gave  MaryRec  the  moneyTh”  

[Jezek  2003,  p.  25]  

 

 (13)   a.  “TracyAg  washed  the  carTh  with  an  enormous  spongeInst”  

b.  “TracyAg  washed  the  carTh  with  StacyCom”  [Levin  &  Rappaport  Hovav  2005,  p.  41]  

                                                                                                               11  As  argued  in  Levin  &  Rappaport  Hovav  (2005),  objects  are  generally  more  prone  to  potential  fragmentation  then  subjects.    

Page 25: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  25  

This   issue   is  made   even  more   puzzling   by   the   fact   that   not   all   the   verbs  which   could  

potentially   present   the   same   argument   alternation   of   “to   give”,   do   in   fact   allow   it,   as  

demonstrated  by  the  example  given  in  (14):  

 

(14)   a.  HeAg  returned  the  moneyTh  to  MaryRec  

b.  *HeAg  returned  MaryRec  the  moneyTh  [Jezek  2003,  p.  25]  

 

Moreover,  only  specific  thematic  roles  can  share  the  same  morphological  expression  in  a  

given  language12,  and  they  do  it  so  systematically  that  it  is  impossible  to  dismiss  it  as  a  

random  and  accidental  occurrence.  Many  scholars  have  in  fact  argued  in  favour  of  some  sort  of  internal  structure  of  

semantic   roles,   convinced   by   the   evidence   discussed   above   that   “the   small   set   of  

unanalysed   roles   that   characterises   an   ideal   semantic   role   approach,   then,   is  

incompatible  with  linguistic  reality”  (Levin  &  Rappaport  Hovav  2005,  p.  42).  

One   last  problem  relating   to   thematic  roles  rises   from  the  claim  made  by  many  

semantic  role  list  approaches  –  particularly  the  earlier  ones  –  that  there  may  be  at  most  

one   instance  of  each  semantic  role  per  sentence  and  that  each  argument  can  bear  one  

and   one   only   role   (Fillmore   1968;   Chomsky   1981).   Unfortunately,   even   in   this   case  

linguistic   evidence   contradicts   such   assumption,   as   shown   in   Gruber   (1965)   and  

Jackendoff  (1972,  1976,  1983),  since  many  verbs  present  dual  semantic  role  assignment  

not  only  when  an  argument  bears  two  semantic  roles  at  once  –  (12)  –,  but  also  when  two  

arguments  bear   the  same  semantic   role  –   (13)  –  and  “with  no  apparent  asymmetry   in  

what   is   predicated   of   the   two   arguments   on   which   to   pin   a   distinction   in   role   type”  

(Dowty  1991,  p.  556):  

 

(12)   a.  Kelly  rolled  down  the  hill    /  Kelly  è   rotolata  giù  dalla  collina  =  AGENT  (Kelly  

rolled  intentionally)  

b.  Kelly   rolled  down   the  hill   /  Kelly  è   rotolata  giù  dalla   collina  =  THEME  (Kelly  

underwent  a  change  of  position  over  which  she  had  no  control)  

                                                                                                                 12  For  example,  in  English  patients  and  recipients  have  the  same  syntactic  realization  in  double  object   constructions,   just   like   the   preposition   “with”   usually   indicates   only   instruments   and  comitatives.  

Page 26: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  26  

(13)   a.  My  brother  resembles  my  grandfather  /  Mio  fratello  assomiglia  a  mio  nonno  =  

THEME  -­‐  THEME    

 

After   more   than   forty   years   since   Fillmore’s   influential   work,   it   is   now   believed   that  

“thematic  roles  do  not  represent  a  strong  explicative  instrument,  they  certainly  aren’t  a  

semantic  primitive  and,  in  more  that  one  occasions,  even  their  existence  has  been  called  

into  question”  (Jezek  2003,  p.  26).        

Thematic   roles   do   not   in   fact   feature   in   the  majority   of   current   approaches   to  

lexical  semantic  representation  and  the  only  attempts  to  reintegrate  them  were  made  by  

purely   semantic   frameworks,   such   as  Role  and  Reference  Grammar   (Foley  &   van  Valin  

1984;   van   Valin   &   La   Polla   1997),   in   which   they   are   referred   to   as  macro-­‐roles,   and  

Dowty’s  proto-­‐roles  (Dowty  1991).  

 

1.2.5  From  verb  meaning  to  the  underlying  event  structures  

 

A   yet   different   attempt   to   overcome   the   problems   and   limitations   of   semantic   roles  

entails  a  shift  of  focus  from  verbs  and  their  syntactic  behaviour  to  the  underlying  event  

structure   they   actually   represent,   clearly   stemming   from   a   strongly   semantic  

perspective.  These  new  theoretical  proposals  assume  that  argument  realisation  derives  

directly  from  verb  meaning,  reason  why  what  needs  to  be  decomposed  into  more  basic  

elements  is,  in  fact,  verb  meaning  itself,  and  not  semantic  roles.  

Such   approaches   are   commonly   known   as   predicate   decomposition   approaches  

and,  even  though  they  have  been  elaborated  in  the  work  of  many  semanticists  in  various  

contexts,  they  are  all  based  on  the  idea  that  the  meaning  of  a  verb  can  be  “formulated  in  

terms  of  one  or  more  primitive  predicates  chosen  to  represent  components  of  meaning  

that  recur  across  significant  sets  of  verbs”  (Levin  &  Rappaport  Hovav  2005,  p.  69)  and  

that   stands   for   what   is   usually   called   event   structure.     One   example   of   predicate  

decomposition   is   that   put   forward   by  Dowty   (1979)   and   briefly   examined   above   (see  

2.2):  the  primitives  found  in  this  account  (DO,  CAUSE,  BECOME)  are  widely  used  and  can  

indeed  be  considered  the  fundamental  ones  in  all  predicate  decompositions.    

Since   verbs  denote  many  and  very  different   types  of   events,   it   is   intuitive   that   the  

sole  use  of  primitives  could  not  do  justice  to  the  huge  variety  of  happenings  in  the  world  

and   their   linguistic   codification,   potentially   leading   to   a  misrepresentation   of   both.   In  

Page 27: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  27  

order  to  avoid  such  a  risk  then,  these  accounts  maintain  that  verb  meaning  is  composed  

not  only  of  primitives,  but  also  of  a  second  kind  of  basic  information  responsible  for  the  

idiosyncratic  element  of  verb’s  meaning,  commonly  referred  to  as  root  (Pesetsky  1995).  

Given   three   deadjectival   verbs   belonging   to   the   same   class   (causative   change-­‐of-­‐state  

verbs),   the   standard   representation   of   their   meanings   is   illustrated   in   the   following  

example:  

 

a. dry:  [[  x  ACT  ]  CAUSE  [  y  BECOME  <DRY>  ]  ]  

b. open:    [[  x  ACT  ]  CAUSE  [  y  BECOME  <OPEN>  ]  ]  

c. shorten:  [[  x  ACT  ]  CAUSE  [  y  BECOME  <SHORT>  ]  ]  [Levin  &  Rappaport  Hovav  2005,  p.  71]  

 

Hence,   the  event  structure  of  verbs  stems  from  the  combination  of   its  root  and  one  or  

more  primitives,  allowing  predicates  to  be  part  of  a  certain  class  while,  at  the  same  time,  

retaining  their  semantic  distinctiveness.  

From   the   example   above,   it   is   also   clear   that   such   representations   allow   verbs  

belonging   to   the   same   semantic   class   (change-­‐of-­‐state)   to   have   decompositions   with  

common   substructures   (x   ACT   >   CAUSE   >   y   BECOME   <…>),   with   roots   of   the   same  

ontological   type   (dry,  open,   short   all   denote   a   transformation   from  state  A   to   state  B),  

recurring  in  the  exact  same  positions  in  these  substructures  (<…>).    

The  two  most  salient  consequences  of  predicate  decompositions  are,  on  the  one  

hand,   the   possibility   of   identifying   every   semantic   class   of   verbs   with   a   given  

decomposition  that  represents  the  basic  event  structure  of  its  members;  on  the  other,  if  

a  verb  is  assigned  a  proper  decomposition,  one  could  predict  which  semantic  class  it  will  

belong  to.    

It   does   not   come   as   a   surprise   then   that   predicate   decomposition   approaches  

have   received   much   praise:   not   only   do   they   feature   an   immediate   and   economic  

apparatus  of  representation,  but,  drawing  a  distinction  between  two  equally  necessary  

semantic  building  blocks  (primitive  and  roots),  they  also  allow  us  to  appreciate  variety  

within  generalisations.  Moreover,  by  their  own  nature,  predicate  decompositions  entail  

relations  between  arguments,  providing  a  good  explanation  as   to  why  only  certain  co-­‐

occurrences  of   arguments   are   systematically  observed,  while  others   seem   to  never  be  

possible  (see  2.4.1).  Lastly,   the  association  of  every  primitive  with  a  specific  argument  

Page 28: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  28  

reveals   the   substructures   of   the   more   general   event   structure   of   every   given   verb,  

enabling  us  to  look  at  their  properties  and,  consequently,  understand  the  reasons  behind  

argument  realisation.    

   

 

 

                                                                         

Page 29: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  29  

Chapter  2  

VerbNet:  a  verb  classification  based  on  argument  alternations  

 

2.1.  Argument  Alternations:  what  they  are  and  why  they  matter  

 

In  the  previous  chapter,  while  introducing  argument  structure  and  how  a  semantic  role  

list  approach  deals  with  it  (see  1.2.4.1),  we  briefly  mentioned  the  linguistic  phenomenon  

known   in   the   literature   as   argument   alternation:   as   the   discussion   about   give   clearly  

demonstrated,  a  verb  can  realise  its  arguments  in  more  than  just  one  syntactic  way,  thus  

giving  rise  to  a  noticeable  variation  in  how  they  can  be  syntactically  expressed.  

As  the  investigation  of  such  linguistic  aspects  deepened,  it  became  apparent  that  

argument  alternations  are  in  fact  the  rule,  rather  than  the  exception.  In  fact,  the  majority  

of  verbs,  in  English  as  well  as  in  all  the  other  languages  studied  so  far,  (DeLancey  1995;  

Guerssel  et  al.  1985)  seem  to  display  at  least  one  form  of  the  broader  set  of  phenomena  

called  multiple  argument  alternations,  which  mainly  consist  of   “pairs  of  sentences  with  

the  same  verb,  related  by  paraphrase  or  subsumption”  (Levin  &  Rappaport  Hovav  2005,  

p.  186).      

A  prime  example  of  such  alternations  is  the  causative-­‐inchoative  alternation  (also  

known   as   anticausative   alternation   or,   simply,   causative   alternation;   see   Haspelmath  

1993),  possibly  the  most  widely  examined  of  all  of  them  and  illustrated  in  the  following  

sentences:  

 

1)     a.  Rebecca  broke  the  pencil.  

  b.  The  pencil  broke.  

2)   a.  Maria  opened  the  door.  

  b.  The  door  opened.  

3)   a.  Thomas  dried  the  clothes.  

  b.  The  clothes  dried.             [Piñón  2001,  p.  346]  

 

As   is   apparent,   this   alternation   concerns   verbs   that   have   “an   intransitive   as  well   as   a  

transitive   use,   where   the   intransitive   use   typically   denotes   a   change-­‐of-­‐state   event  

undergone  by  some  entity  and  the  transitive  use  denotes  that  this  change-­‐of-­‐state  event  

Page 30: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  30  

has   been   brought   about   or   caused   by   some   different   entity”   (Schäfer   2009,   p.   641).    

Therefore,   it   is   understandable   that   the   transitive   variants   (a)   have   also   been   called  

causative,   and   they   can   be   paraphrased   as   “‘cause   to   V-­‐intransitive’”,   whereas   the  

intransitive  ones  (b)  have  been  labeled  inchoative.    

Further  research  has  also  demonstrated  that  a  superficial  and  general  semantic  

similarity  between  two  or  more  verbs  cannot  be  taken  as  a  valid  criterion  to  establish  or  

predict   what   alternations   they   might   present   and,   consequently,   share,   as   illustrated  

very  well  in  the  famous  case  of  break  and  hit.  In  “The  Grammar  of  hitting  and  Breaking”  

(1970),   Fillmore   focuses   precisely   on   this   pair   because,   given   their   shared   basic  

meaning,  one  would  be  prone  to  assume  that  they  behave  in  a  similar  syntactic  fashion.  

However,  as  the  following  sentences  show,  this  is  not  the  case:  

 

4)   The  stick  broke.  

5)   *The  tree  hit.  [Fillmore  1970,  p.  126  –  128]  

 

Even   though   both   verbs   can   indeed   be   “characterized   as   agent-­‐act-­‐on-­‐patient   verbs”  

(Levin   &   Rappaport   Hovav,   2005,   p.   1),   break   and   hit   appear   nonetheless   to   act   in   a  

dissimilar  way,   and,  more   importantly,   not   only   in   relation   to   the  causative-­‐inchoative  

alternation  described  above.      

One   more   difference   that   Fillmore   notices   in   his   aforementioned   work   is   that  

related   to   the   possible   readings   of   sentences   that   feature   “stative   adjectives”   derived  

from  the  two  verbs  in  question,  presented  below:  

 

6)   The  window  was  {broken}.  

7)   The  window  was    {hit}.  [Fillmore  1970,  p.  131]  

 

As   one  may   intuitively   notice,   while   the   sentence   in   1)   can   be   “understood   either   as  

passive   or   as   description   of   states13”,   the   sentence   in   2)   “can   be   understood   only   as  

passive”   (Fillmore   1970,   p.   131).     This   also   means   that   sentence   like   1)   carry   an  

idiosyncratic  ambiguity  unknown  to  sentences  like  2).  In  a  later  article,  Fillmore  (1977,  

                                                                                                               13  Called  also  eventive  reading  in  Levin  &  Rappaport  Hovav  (2005,  p.  2).  

Page 31: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  31  

pp.  74-­‐79)  also  stressed  that  sentences  like  those  in  (8)  cannot  be  construed  as  simple  

paraphrases,  whereas  those  in  (9)  can:  

 

(8)   a.  John  broke  the  fence  with  the  stick  

  b.  John  broke  the  stick  against  the  fence  

(9)   a.  John  hit  the  fence  with  the  stick  

  b.  John  hit  the  stick  against  the  fence  

 

The   flexibility   of   syntactic   behaviour   exhibited   by   so   many   verbs   has,   of   course,  

challenged  all  those  frameworks  based  on  the  assumption  that  the  argument  structure  

of  a  given  verb  is  encoded  in  its  lexical  entry,  which  alone  determines  the  projection  of  

arguments  onto  syntax.  However,   if   this  were   the  case,   it  would  be  difficult   to  explain  

why   a   verb   should   display  more   than   one  way   to   syntactically   realise   the   exact   same  

arguments,   and   why   verbs   with   similar   meaning   do   not   allow   the   same   argument  

alternations  (see  I.2.4.1.).  

  This  theoretical  issue  has  led  linguists  to  reconsider  the  status  of  all  the  instances  

of   multiple   argument   realisations,   drawing   a   distinction   between   at   least   two   major  

types:  traditional  argument  alternations  and  so-­‐called  “event  composition”.  

 

2.1.2.  Traditional  argument  alternations  

 

These   alternations   are   by   far   the   most   studied   ones:   they   consist   of   an   alternate  

realisation  of  a  single  set  of  arguments,  such  as  those  illustrated  above  in  (8)  and  (9).    

Traditionally,   the  possibility   for  a  verb   to  realise   its  arguments   in   two  different  

ways  was  explained  by  structural  approaches  by  assuming  a  single  lexical  entry  for  both  

forms.  These  are  believed   to  have  a   common  underlying   syntactic   structure:  however,  

one   realisation   is   construed   as   the   basic   one,   from  which   the   other   one   is   derived   by  

means   of   transformational   rules.   This   is   the   case   of   the   active-­‐passive   alternation  

illustrated  in  (10)  and  described  by  Chomsky  in  these  terms  (Chomsky  1957):  

 

(10)   a.  The  mouse  ate  the  cheese  

  b.  The  cheese  was  eaten  by  the  mouse                          [Levin  &  Rappaport  Hovav  2005,  p.  196]  

Page 32: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  32  

Explanations  of  this  kind  were  also  proposed  for  other  alternations,  such  as  the  dative  

alternation  and  the  locative  alternation  (Hall  1965).  

  However,   it  quite   soon  became  apparent   that  not   all   the   instances  of   argument  

alternations  could  actually  be  explained  in  this  way,  as  the  discussion  above  regarding  

hit  and  break  illustrated.  Recently,  many  linguists  and  researchers  have  in  fact  stressed  

that,   even   though   alternations   are   traditionally   construed   as   twofold   syntactic  

realisations  of  the  exact  same  argument,  “the  definition  of  alternation  does  not  exclude  

the   fact   that  each  syntactic  variant   is  accompanied  by  specific  semantic  and  pragmatic  

inferences  that  determine  a  change  in  the  interpretation  of  a  sentence  depending  on  the  

way  the  same  argument  is  realised  at  the  syntactic  level”  (Lenci  2008,  p.  12).    

It   is   within   this   new   approach   to   argument   alternations   that   positions   like  

Beavers’    (Beavers  2006)  and  Roland  and  Jurafsky’s  (Roland  &  Jurafsky  2002)  have  to  be  

placed.  In  relation  to  the  object-­‐oblique  alternation,  Beavers  proposed  “The  Principle  of  

Contrast   for   Alternations”,   according   to  which,   if   a   verb   allows   two   or  more   different  

argument   realisations   it   is   because   they   necessarily   express   some   sort   of   contrast,  

analysable  in  terms  of  different  parameters  (affectedness  of  the  participants,  telicity  of  

the  event  described,  control  over  the  event,  etc.).  For  instance,  Beavers  notes  how,  in  a  

particular  type  of  direct/oblique  alternation  in  English,  the  direct  realisation  is  specified  

for  some  effect  that  may  or  may  not  be  total  in  any  sense  (11a)  while  the  corresponding  

oblique  realisation  is  not  specified  at  all  (11b):  

 

(11)   a.  John  cut  the  bread  

  b.  John  cut  at  the  bread  [Beavers  2006,  p.  116]  

 

This   is   demonstrated   by   the   fact   that   only   the   second   one   can   occur  with   an   explicit  

context  in  which  no  affectedness  occurs  at  all  (12b),  while  the  first  one  is  not  acceptable  

(12a):  

 

(12)   a.  John  cut  at  the  pie,  but  in  his  drunken  state  managed  to  miss  it  entirely    

b.  *John  cut  the  pie,  but  in  his  drunken  state  managed  to  miss  it  entirely  [Beavers  2006,  p.  116]  

 

Page 33: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  33  

Along  the  same  lines,  Roland  and  Jurafsky  (2002)  compared  five  different  and  variously  

derived   sources   of   subcategorisation   information   in   order   to   investigate  whether   it   is  

actually  true  that  different  frames  allowed  by  the  same  verb  convey  the  same  meaning.  

They  examined  the  effect  of  verb  sense  on  frame  probability  by  focusing  on  instances  of  

ambiguous  verbs  and  their  findings  demonstrated  that  different  senses  of  the  same  verb  

differ   in   frame   probability,   just   as   different   verbs   differ   in   frame   probability.   This  

evidence   prompted   them   to   propose   the   Lemma   Argument   Probability   hypothesis  

(Roland  &   Jurafsky  2002,  p.  336),  according  to  which   it   is  not  possible   to  make  claims  

about   the   probabilistic   subcategorisation   frames   of   a   given   verb,   but   only   about   the  

probabilistic   frame   of   each   and   every   sense   of   any   given   verb.   So,   for   instance,   the  

probability   for  a  certain   frame  of   the  verb   to  charge   varies  greatly   if   the  sense  we  are  

investigating  is  that  of  “to  accuse”  as  in  (13a),  or  is  that  of  “to  bill”,  as  shown  in  (13b):  

 

(13)   a.   Separately,   a   Campeau   shareholder   filed   suit,   charging   Campeau,   Chairman  

Robert  Campeau  and  other  officers  with  violating  securities  law  

  b.  Currently,  the  Government  charges  nothing  for  such  filings  [Roland  &  Jurafsky  2002,  p.  337]  

 

The  current   status  of   classic  argument  alternations   is   still  hotly  debated  and  a   clearer  

view  on  the  matter  could  be  achieved  only  with  further  research,  possibly  on  languages  

other  than  English.            

 

2.1.3.  Event  Composition  

       

Another   kind   of   phenomenon   belonging   to   the   broad   class   of   multiple   argument  

realisation   is   the   one   we   defined   “event   composition”,   and   which   has   been   widely  

recognised  as  very  different  from  the  traditional  argument  alternations  discussed  above,  

as  illustrated  by  the  sentences  in  (11):    

 

(11)   a.  Pat  ran  

  b.  Pat  ran  to  the  beach  

  c.  Pat  ran  herself  ragged  

  d.  Pat  ran  her  shoes  to  shreds  

Page 34: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  34  

  e.  Pat  ran  clear  of  the  falling  rocks  

  f.  The  coach  ran  the  athletes  around  the  track      [Rappaport  Hovav  &  Levin  1998,  p.  98]  

 

As   one   can   see,   the   sentences   in   (11)   follow  a   progression   of   complexity   of   the   event  

described  by  means  of  adding  either  a  novel  argument,  an  adjunct  or  both.  A  traditional  

model   that   views   argument   realisations   as   encoded   in   the   lexical   semantic  

representation  of  the  verb  that  allows  them,  and  syntactically  expressed  through  linking  

rules   (Chomsky   1965,  Hall   1965),  would   simply   assume   that   every   verb   has   as  many  

lexical  semantic  representations  as  the  argument  alternations  it  allows  for.  However,  as  

we  have  already  argued,  cases  like  the  ones  illustrated  in  (11)  are  the  rule,  rather  than  

the   exception,   and   it   seems   to   be   computationally   implausible   and   counterintuitive   at  

best  to  assume  six  different  entries  for  the  verb  to  run,  each  for  every  possible  argument  

realisation.  

  However,   as   already   discussed   in   I.2.5,   verbs   denote   many   and   very   different  

types   of   events   that   take   place   in   the   extra-­‐linguistic   reality   and,   since   some   of   those  

happenings  are  more  complex  than  others,  it  is  not  surprising  that  even  their  linguistic  

representations  would  follow  this  dynamic.  This  fact  can  be  illustrated  by  the  examples  

in   (11),   where   there   is   a   crescendo   of   complexity   in   the   events   described   by   each  

sentence,  progressing  from  the  most  basic  one  (11a),  with  only  one  participant,  to  (11f),  

with   two   participants   and   the   information   about   the   direction   of   the   “running”,   with  

intermediate  possibilities  in  (11b-­‐11e).  

  This   evidence   has   prompted   some   linguists   to   develop   approaches   commonly  

referred   to   as   “constructional   approaches”   (Carrier   &   Randall   1993,   Goldberg   &  

Jackendoff   2004,   Rappaport   Hovav   &   Levin   2002),   according   to   which   part   of   the  

meaning   of   a   complex   sentence   (e.g.   11d,   11e,   11f)   is   not   conveyed   only   by   lexical  

elements,   but   also   by   the   phrasal   patterns   according   to  which   those   lexical   items   are  

built  upon.  Moreover,  it  is  worth  stressing  that  these  regular  patterns  are  greatly  found  

in   English   (Goldberg  &   Jackendoff   2004,   pp.   533-­‐535),   and  most   likely   in   every   other  

language,   hence   confirming   the   idea   put   forward   by   these   approaches   that   the  

structuring  itself  of  any  given  sentence  is  somehow  responsible  for  the  semantic  content  

it  conveys.    

Page 35: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  35  

  Thus,  sentences  like  those  in  (11)  can  be  analysed  and  decomposed  in  terms  of  a  

basic   event   (11a),   variously   incremented   through   the   adding   of   an   extra   argument-­‐

taking  predicate  (11c),  an  additional  argument  (11b)  or  both  (11d,  11e,  11f),  giving  rise  

in  all  cases  to  complex  events  derived  by  a  basic  simple  one  (11a).  

 

2.2.  Verb  classes  

 

Regardless   of   the   approach   taken   to   tackle   the   issues   related   to   multiple   argument  

realisations,  one  thing  all  researchers  agree  upon  is  the  possibility  for  certain  verbs  that  

allow   specific   argument   realisations   (whether   it   is   argument   alternation   or   event  

composition)  to  be  clustered  together  in  distinct  semantic  classes,  in  English  and  well  as  

in  other  languages  (Talmy  1985,  1991;  Green  1973;  Choi  &  Bowerman  1991).    

  In  fact,  it  has  long  been  recognised  that  verbs  present  regular  syntactic  patterns  

of  argument   realisation   that  are  not   idiosyncratic,  but   they  are  shared  by  other  verbs,  

whose   semantic   coherency   is   far   from   being   random   or   casual.   Going   back   to   the  

examples   in   (8)   and   (9),   Fillmore   also   noticed   that   the   verbs   to   break   and   to   hit   are  

indeed  representative  of  a  larger  set  of  verbs,  such  as  those  listed  in  (12):  

 

(12)   a.  Break  verbs:  bend,  fold,  shatter,  crack  

  b.  Hit  verbs:  slap,  strike,  bump,  stroke  [Fillmore  1970,  p.  130]  

 

This  distinction  allowed  for  a  finer  classification  of  those  verbs  that,  just  like  break  and  

hit,   were   thought   to   be   very   similar,   yet,   which   presented   quite   different   syntactic  

realisations   difficult   to   account   for.   Based   on   the   possibility   of   verbs   to   take   part   in  

certain  given  realisations,  many  different  classes  were  established,  and,  considering  the  

inherent   semantic   coherency   of   all   of   them,   it   became   clear   that   their   characteristic  

argument  realisation  patterns  could  be  ascribed  to  the  semantic  properties  of  each  class  

(Guersell  et  al.  1985;  Hale  &  Keyser  1986,  1987).  

  However,   it   also   became   apparent   that   the   identification   of   the   facets   of   verb  

meaning   that  were   responsible   for   the   syntactic   expression  of   a   given   class  was  not   a  

small  task:  on  the  one  hand,  verbs  that  were  expected  to  fall  into  a  certain  class  failed  to  

(see   the   example   of   the   verb   to   return   in   I.2.4.1),  while,   on   the   other   hand,   the   same  

Page 36: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  36  

argument  realisation  can  be  shared  by  verbs  belonging  to  different  classes,  as  shown  in  

(13)  by  to  scream  and  to  say,  a  manner  of  speaking  verb  and  a  content  of  speaking  one  

respectively:  

 

(13)   a.  Evelyn  screamed  (to  Marilyn)  to  go  

  b.  Evelyn  said  (to  Marilyn)  to  go  [Levin  &  Rappaport  Hovav  2005,  p.  16]  

 

Even   though   the   classification   of   verbs   based   on   their   syntactic   patterns   can   be  

problematic   and   controversial,   verb   classes   have   proven   to   be   a   great   tool   for  

investigating   verb  behaviour  with  noticeable  predictive   ability.   The  only   existing   verb  

classification  of  this  kind  is  the  one  proposed  by  Levin  (Levin  1993)  for  English  and  fully  

exploited  in  the  construction  of  VerbNet,  a  computational  resource  for  verbal  behaviour  

that  we  will  present  in  the  next  paragraph.  

 

2.3.  VerbNet:  a  computational  verb  lexicon  for  English    

 

With  the  aim  of  providing  a  reliable  computational  verb  lexicon  that  could  be  used  in  as  

many  Natural  Language  Processing  (NLP)  tasks  as  possible,  Kipper  and  colleagues  built  

VerbNet   (VN)   (Kipper   et   al.   2000;   Kipper-­‐Sculer   2005),   which   is   an   extensive  

computational  verb  lexicon  for  English.    

The   starting   point   of   VN  was   Levin’s   verb   classification   (Levin   1993),  which   is  

still  today  the  largest  verb  classification  for  English.  What  makes  this  classification  such  

a  useful   tool   for   investigating  verb  behaviour   is   the   fact   it   features  both   semantic  and  

syntactic  verb  profiles.  In  particular,  Levin  based  her  work  on  the  assumption  that  verbs  

which  display  the  same  argument  alternation  (or  sets  of  alternations)  also  share  certain  

facets   of   meaning   that   make   it   possible   to   group   verbs   into   semantically   coherent  

classes.  Levin  worked  on  a  sample  of  3,024  verbs  and,  after  a  thorough  examination  of  

their  syntactic  behaviour,  she  identified  79  argument  alternations  involving  NN  and  PP  

complements,  according  to  which  verbs  were  classified  into  49  broad  semantic  classes,  

further  subdivided  into  192  fine-­‐grained  semantic  classes.    

In  order   to   create  a  more   solid  and   reliable   lexical   resource,   at  different   stages  

Kipper   and   colleagues   expanded   Levin’s   original   verb   classification,   enlarging   the  

Page 37: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  37  

sample  of  verbs   taken   into  consideration,  and,  consequently,   introducing  novel  classes  

and   subclasses   at   once:   the   last   available   version   of   VN   (VerbNet   3.2)   features   8537  

verbs   represented,   273   main   classes   and   214   subclasses14.   Also,   for   the   purpose   of  

enriching  each  entry  with  a  great  variety  of  semantic  information,  they  mapped  VN  with  

other   important   on-­‐line   lexical   resources,   such   as   WordNet   (Miller   1990,   Fellbaum  

1998),  Xtag  (XTAG  Research  group  2001),  FrameNet  (Baker  et  al.  1998),  and  OntoNotes  

Sense  Groupings  (Hovy  et  al.  2006),  therefore  providing  over  90%  token  coverage  of  the  

Proposition  Bank  data  (Palmer  et  al.  2005).    

Moreover,  they  provided  each  entry  with  a  complete  description  of  its  properties,  

so  that,  in  VN,  each  verb  is  not  only  ascribed  to  a  specific  semantic  class  and  described  

by   a   set   of   co-­‐members,   but   it   is   also   defined   in   terms   of   more   traditional   semantic  

information,  such  as  thematic  roles,  semantic  predicates,  selectional  restrictions  and,  of  

course,  syntactic  frames  (Fig.2).  

 

   

Figure  2:  Lexical  entry  for  the  enforce  class  in  VN    

A   typical   entry   in   VN   is   illustrated   in   Fig.1,   which   represent   the   enforce   class.   The  

complete   description   of   such   a   class   is   articulated   in   three   distinct   sections:   the   first  

provides   information   about   the  members   of   the   class,  which,   in   this   case,   are   control,  

                                                                                                               14  Freely  consultable  at:  http://verbs.colorado.edu/verb-­‐index/.    

Page 38: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  38  

enforce   and   impose.   For   each  of   them   there   is   also   the   corresponding   reference   in   the  

databases  mentioned  above  (e.g.  WN:  WordNet,  G:  Groupings).  

  The   second   section   gives   the   information   related   to   thematic   roles   and   their  

selectional  preferences:  for  instance,  for  the  verbs  listed  in  this  class,  there  has  to  be  an  

Agent,   which   needs   to   be   [+ANIMATE   &   +ORGANIZATION],   and   a   Theme,   for   which  

there  is  no  indication  of  specific  selectional  preferences.  

  The  third  and  last  part  indicates  the  remaining  properties  of  the  verbs  included  

in  this  class,  namely  a  set  of  frames  consisting  of:  

 

I. A  brief  description  of  the  syntactic  frames  allowed  by  the  verbs  of  the  class  (“NP  

V  NP”  and  “NP  V  THAT  S”);  

II. An  example  of  a  sentence  for  each  frames;  

III. A   syntactic   description   in   which   each   thematic   role   is   associated   to   the  

corresponding  position  in  the  sentence  given;  

IV. A  set  of  semantic  predicates  that  includes  a  temporal  function  indicating  in  which  

phase  of   an   event   the  predicate   is   true:   in   this   case,   it   is   the  preparatory   stage  

(during(E)).      

 

Over   the   past   decade,   VN   has   been   received   with   great   acclaim   by   the   research  

community,  proving  to  be  a  reliable  computational  tool  in  a  great  number  of  NLP  tasks,  

such   as:   automatic   verb   acquisition   (Swift   2005),   semantic   role   labelling   (Swier   &  

Stevenson  2004;  Yi  et  al.  2007),  robust  semantic  parsing  (Shi  &    Mihalcea  2005),  word  

sense   disambiguation   (Dang   2004),   building   conceptual   graphs   (Hensman  &   Dunnion  

2004)   and   creating   a   unified   lexical   resource   for   knowledge   extraction   (Croch  &  King  

2005).    

  Given   its   unparalleled   success,   one   would   expect   to   find   a   VN   –   or   at   least   a  

comparable  lexical  resource  –  for  many  other  languages;  however,  this  is  not  the  case.  In  

fact,   thus   far,   no   attempt   has   been   made   to   build   such   a   precious   resource   by   non-­‐

English  speaking  research  groups,  Italian  included.    

Moreover,   a   verb   classification  based  on  argument  alternations  akin   to   the  one  

proposed  by  Levin  (Levin  1993),  and  used  by  Kipper  and  colleagues  to  build  VN,  was  not  

available  for  Italian.  Taking  this  into  consideration,  with  this  work  we  tried  precisely  to  

compensate   for   this   shortage   –   although   only   partially   –,   carrying   out   a   descriptive  

Page 39: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  39  

analysis  of  those  argument  alternations  we  found  using  an  annotated  sample  of  Italian  

verbs,  which  we  present  in  detail  in  the  following  chapters.    

Hence,   this   thesis   represents   the  very   first   step   towards   the   construction  of   an  

Italian   VerbNet,   with   the   aim   of   providing   the   Italian   research   community,   and  

whosoever   would   like   to   conduct   their   work   on   Italian   verbs,   with   a   computational  

lexical  resource  comparable  to  that  available  for  English.  

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Page 40: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  40  

Chapter  3  

Towards  a  classification  of  argument  alternations  in  Italian  

 

The  development  of  a  classification  of  argument  alternations  for  Italian  verbs  has  been  

carried   out   in   a   two-­‐stage   process.   In   the   first   stage   (see   section   3.1),   the  

subcategorisation   frames   for   a   sample   of   the   most   frequent   Italian   verbs   have   been  

manually   extracted   from   an   Italian   monolingual   dictionary.   In   the   second   phase   (see  

section   3.2),   we   semi-­‐automatically   identified   the  most   significant   alternations   in   our  

annotated  sample.      

   

3.1.  Subcategorisation  frames  for  a  sample  of  Italian  verbs  

 

3.1.1.  Resources  

 

In   order   to   identify   the   subcategorisation   frames   for   Italian   verbs,   we   used   the  most  

updated  online  version  of   the  only   Italian  dictionary  that   indicates  the  verb  valency   in  

the   lexical   entry,   namely   Il   Sabatini   Coletti   2012   (S&C:   Sabatini   and   Coletti,   2012)15.  

Overall,   this  dictionary  registers  185,000  headwords  and  definitions,  80,000  examples,  

83,000  etymologies  with  82,500  dates  of   first  attestations,   the  conjugation  of  all  verbs  

and  division  into  syllables  and  pronunciation  for  all  entries.    

In  relation  to  the  verb  class,  the  dictionary  contains  9467  lexical  entries,  of  which  

1746   are  marked   as   high   frequency   verbs.   Fig.   1   represents   the   typical   structure   of   a  

verbal   lexical  entry.  The  first   information  given  is  the  division  in  syllables,   followed  by  

the  indication  of  the  word  class  (“v.”)  and  few  information  about  the  conjugation  (“irr.:  

coniug.  come  porre”).  Then,  for  each  verb  there  is  a  list  of  its  senses,  clustered  together  

according   to   the   subcategorisation   frame   they   share16.   For   instance,   the   verb   imporre  

illustrated  in  Fig.1  has  nine  possible  senses,  four  of  which  occur  with  transitive  frames  

([sogg-­‐v-­‐arg-­‐prep.arg],   [sogg-­‐v-­‐arg]),   while   the   remaining   five   occur   with   pronominal  

frames  ([sogg-­‐v],  [sogg-­‐v-­‐arg],  [sogg-­‐v-­‐prep.  arg].      

However,   the   formalism   used   by   the   authors   of   S&C   neglects   a   piece   of  

information   that   is   crucial   for   the  purpose  of  our  work,   that   is   the  specification  of   the  

                                                                                                               15  http://www.elexico.com/en/Products/all/1642812-­‐1930385-­‐1970536-­‐1926039.html  16  See  Appendix  A  for  a  complete  list  of  the  subcategorisation  frames  available  in  S&C.  

Page 41: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  41  

preposition   introducing   the   prepositional   phrase   (PP).   For   instance,   in   the   first  

subcategorisation   frame   of   imporre   (Fig.3),   it   should   be   specified   that   the   preposition  

introducing  the  indirect  argument  is  a,  a  piece  of   information  that  gets  lost   in  marking  

the  slot  in  question  as  a  generic  “prep.  arg.”.  

 

   

Figure  3:  The  lexical  entry  of  the  verb  imporre  in  S&C    

We   overcame   this   shortcoming   by   consulting   the   online   version   of   LexIt,   an  

automatically  built  corpus-­‐based  lexical  resource  on  Italian  argument  structure  (Lenci  et  

al.   2012)17.     The   data   were   extracted   from   two   automatically   parsed   corpora,   La  

Repubblica  (Baroni  et  al.  2004:  approximately  380M  tokens),  and  a  dump  of  the  Italian  

Wikipedia  database  (approximately  152M  tokens).    

In  LexIt,  each  lemma  is  associated  with  a  syntactic  profile  and  a  semantic  profile.    

The  latter  describes  the  set  of  possible  slot  fillers  and  their  selectional  preferences.  The  

former  generalises  over  the  range  of  syntactic  environments  in  which  the  lemma  occurs  

by   representing   them  as   a   set   of   frames   and   a   set   of   slots.   Crucially,   for   each   slot   the  

preposition   that   introduces  every  prepositional  argument   is   specified   (see  Fig.  4)  and,  

overall,   there   are   3873   verbs   from   La   Repubblica   and   2831   verbs   from   the   Italian  

Wikipedia  corpus.    

                                                                                                               17  http://sesia.humnet.unipi.it/lexit/  

Page 42: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  42  

   

Figure  4:  Syntactic  profile  of  the  verb  imporre  in  LexIt    

If  we  look  at  Fig.2,  what  we  see  is  the  set  of  subcategorisation  frames  allowed  by  

the  verb   imporre  and  sorted  by  frequency.  In  total,   there  are  ten  frames,   four  of  which  

occur   with   transitive   frames   (subj#obj,   subj#obj#comp-­‐a,   subj#obj#comp-­‐in,  

subj#compl-­‐a#inf-­‐di),  two  of  which  occur  with  intransitive  frames  (subj#0,  subj#comp-­‐

a),   and   the   remaining   four   occur   with   intransitive   pronominal   frames   (subj#si#0,  

subj#si#compl-­‐in,  subj#si#compl-­‐in,  subj#si#obj).  As  one  can  see,  every  time  there  is  a  

prepositional   argument   (marked   as   “compl-­‐“)   within   a   given   frame,   there   is   also   the  

precise  indication  of  what  preposition  introduces  that  complement  (e.g.  “compl-­‐a”).    

These  two  resources  have  complementary  advantages  and  limitations.  While  S&C  

is   able   to   discriminate   between   the   different   verb   senses,   the  minimal   lexical   unit   in  

LexIt   is   the  verbal   lemma.  S&C,  however,   lacks   the   information  about   the  prepositions  

introducing   prepositional   arguments,   whereas,   as   we   discussed   above,   LexIt   features  

this  important  information.  At  the  same  time,  the  subcategorisation  frames  found  in  S&C  

are   more   reliable   than   the   automatically   extracted   ones   found   in   LexIt,   due   to   the  

inherent   difficulty   of   automatically   carving   syntactic   frames   from   corpora   (Schulte   im  

Page 43: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  43  

Walde   2009).   Lastly,   since   the   data   in   LexIt   are   grounded   on   linguistic   productions  

attested  in  two  corpora,  it  is  possible  to  associate  every  verb  with  its  subcategorisation  

frames  frequency  in  the  two  corpora,   therefore  obtaining  a  precise  figure  for  each  and  

every   lemma.   On   the   contrary,   it   is   not   possible   to   carry   out   this   operation  with   the  

frames  registered   in  S&C:  although   the  most   frequent   lemmas  are  marked,   there   is  no  

further   indication   of   how   frequent   their   occurrence   actually   is,   both   in   terms   of   the  

overall  frequency  and  in  terms  of  relative  frequency.  

For   all   these   reasons,   it   was   thought   best   to   integrate   the   two   resources  

described  above,  supplementing  the  shortcomings  of  one  with  the  strengths  of  the  other  

and  vice  versa.      

 

3.1.2.  Carving  verbs  subcategorisation  frames  

 

In  order  to  have  a  sample  of  manageable  size,  we  first   took  the  1746  verbs  marked  as  

high  frequency  verbs  in  S&C  and  then  we  matched  them  with  the  corresponding  verbs  in  

La  Repubblica  corpus:  this  way  we  assigned  each  verb  a  precise  frequency  value,  thereby  

ordering  all  of  our  verbs  accordingly.    

  Once   the   frequency   list   was   drawn   up,   we   narrowed   our   sample   down   to   the  

1000  top  frequent  verbs.  We  then  manually  identified  for  each  verb  the  corresponding  

frames   registered   in   S&C,   filtering   out   the   technical,   archaic   and   literary   uses,  

integrating   the   information  about   the  prepositions  available   in  LexIt.  We  obtained   the  

Excel  table  in  Appendix  B  in  which,  for  each  of  the  4450  verb-­‐frame  pairs,  the  following  

properties  were  encoded:    

 

I. Frequency   in   the   La   Repubblica   Corpus:   a   number   that   indicates   the   exact  

frequency  value  of  each  verb  in  the  aforementioned  corpus;    

II. Subcategorisation   frame:   the   formalism   adopted   consisted   of   a   series   of      

abbreviations,   which   indicated   the   arguments   of   the   predicate   in   question,  

separated   by   hash   tags.   Noun   phrases   (NP)   were   further   divided   according   to  

their   syntactic   position   (subj   =   subject   /   obj   =   object),   whereas   prepositional  

phrases   (PP)  were   accompanied   by   the   preposition   that   introduces   them   curly  

brackets   ({a}PP).   As   for   verbs,   we   indicated   the   pronominal   form   by   adding   a  

suffix  “–si”  to  the  abbreviation  for  “verb”  (V-­‐si).  Since  we  also  took  into  account  

Page 44: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  44  

argumental   sentences,   we   used   curly   brackets   to   mark   the   complementiser  

introducing   them,   and   the   abbreviations   “inf”   and   “fin”   to   indicate   an   infinitive  

clause  and  a  finite  clause  respectively  ({di}inf  /  {che}fin).  For  instance,  one  of  the  

frames  of  the  verb   imporre   in  S&C  is  [sogg-­‐v-­‐prep.arg]:   this   frame  was  enriched  

by   integrating   the   information   relative   to   the   preposition   found   in   the  

corresponding   frame   in   LexIt,   namely   [subj#obj#comp-­‐a],   and   the   resulting  

frame  was  registered  in  our  file  as  [NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{a}PP]  (Table  2):  

 

 

     S&C:      [sogg-­‐v-­‐prep.arg]  

          [NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{a}PP]  

     LexIt:  [subj#obj#comp-­‐a]  

   

Table  2:  Combination  of  the  information  in  S&C  with  that  found  in  LexIt    

We  registered  a  total  of  136  subcategorisation  frames,  which  we  list  and  briefly  

explain  in  Appendix  C.  

III. Thematic   Roles:   for   each   argument   we   indicated   the   relevant   thematic   role,  

basing  our  classification  on  the  inventory  of  36  roles  proposed  in  the  context  of  

the  VerbNet  project  (VerbNet  Annotation  Guidelines,  pp.  19-­‐22).  So,  for  the  frame  

of  the  verb  imporre  in  Fig.3,  we  identified  the  following  thematic  roles  (Table  3):  

 

 

[NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{a}PP]  

NP_subj:  AGENT  

NP_obj:  THEME  

{a}PP:  RECIPIENT    

Table  3:  Thematic  roles  of  the  frame  [NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{a}PP]of  imporre    

IV. Reference  in  S&C:  for  each  entry  we  also  specified  the  frame  and,  if  present,  the  

sense,   in   which   all   the   information   listed   was   valid   (first   and   second   digit  

respectively).   For   instance,   for   the   verb   imporre   in   Fig.1,   there   will   be   five  

numbers  indicating  which  one  of  the  five  frames  allowed  by  it  we  are  referring  to;  

Page 45: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  45  

moreover,   for   those   frames   that  presented  a   subdivision   in   senses,  we  added  a  

second  digit  specifying  to  which  one  of  these  senses  it  pertains.    

V. Selectional   Preferences:   for   each   slot   of   each   frame,   we   also   highlighted   its  

selectional  preferences,  namely  the  semantic  constraints  that  every  verb  impose  

on  its  argument  in  order  for  the  clause  to  be  acceptable.  Also  in  this  case,  we  used  

the  information  available  in  LexIt,  listing  for  every  slot  of  every  verb  its  possible  

semantic   categories,   taken   from   the   24   WordNet   super-­‐senses   (Miller,   1990;  

Fellbaum  1998):  

 

ANIMAL,  ARTIFACT,  ACT,  ATTRIBUTE,  FOOD,  COMMUNICATION,  KNOWLEDGE,  

BODY   PART,   EVENT,   NATURAL   PHENOMENON,   SHAPE,   GROUP,   LOCATION,  

MOTIVATION,   NATURAL   OBJECT,   PERSON,   PLANT,   POSSESSION,   PROCESS,  

QUANTITY,  FEELING,  SUBSTANCE,  STATE,  TIME.  

 

So,   for   the   frame   we   discussed   above   of   the   verb   imporre,   we   identified   the  

following  selectional  preferences  (Table  4):  

 

 

[NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{a}PP]  

NP_subj:  Person/Group  

NP_obj:  Act/Event/Process/State  

{a}PP:  Person/Group  

 Table  4:  Selectional  preferences  of  the  frame  [NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{a}PP]  for  imporre  

 

3.2.  Data  extraction  

 

In  the  first  part  of  this  project,  we  wanted  to  investigate  which  frames  were  associated  

with   the   verbs   in   our   sample.   Once   the   annotation   procedure   described   in   3.1.2   was    

completed,  we  moved  on  to  second  phase,  namely  the  identification  of:  a)  the  argument  

alternations  allowed  by  the  verbs  in  our  sample;  b)  how  frequent  they  are  and  for  which  

verbs  they  are  valid.      

  Point   a)   has   been   accomplished   by   exploiting   a   semiautomatic   procedure,  

consisting   of   an   automatic   identification   of   the   top   correlated   frames,   followed   by   a  

Page 46: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  46  

manual  inspection.  On  the  other  hand,  point  b)  was  carried  out  manually,  based  on  the  

filtered  list  of  plausible  alternations  obtained  in  phase  a).            

 

3.2.1.  Automatic  extraction  of  argument  alternation  candidates  

 

Given  the  very  high  number  of  possible  frame  combinations  (10,011),  as  well  as  the  high  

number  of   verb-­‐frame  pairs   identified   (4,450),   the   identification  of  possible   argument  

alternations   could   not   have   been   conducted   manually.   Therefore,   we   decided   to  

automatically  identify  the  possible  candidates  comparing  the  distribution  of  frames  over  

our  target  verbs.    

  More  specifically,  we  represented  each  frame  as  a  vector  of  binary  values  whose  

dimensions   indicate   whether   a   verb   allows   that   frame   (1)   or   not   (0),   and   whose  

dimensionality   equals   the   total   number   of   our   target   verbs   (1000).   Thus,   the   frames  

[NP_subj#V#NP_obj],   [NP_subj#V],   [NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{a}PP],   [NP_subj#V#{di}inf]  

are  associated  to  vectors  in  a  manner  similar  to  that  shown  in  Table  5.  This  illustrative  

toy  space  encodes,   for   instance,   the  fact  that  the   [NP_subj#V#NP_obj]   frame  is  allowed  

by   imporre,  consegnare   and  dire,  but  not   for  arrivare   and  piovere.  On   the  contrary,   the  

[NP_subj#V]  frame  is  allowed  only  by  arrivare.  

 

  imporre   arrivare   piovere   consegnare   dire  

NP_subj#V#NP_obj   1   0   0   1   1  

NP_subj#V   0   1   0   0   0  

NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{a}PP   1   0   0   1   1  

NP_subj#V#{di}inf   1   0   0   0   1    

Table  5:  Examples  of  vectoral  representation  of  subcategorisation  frames    

In   order   to   identify   which   of   the   10,011   possible   frame   pairs   may   constitute   a   real  

alternation  for  at  least  a  subset  of  our  verbs,  we  calculated  the  correlation  between  the  

corresponding   vector   pairs,   filtering   out   all   those   pairings  whose   correlation   failed   to  

reach  the  0.2  threshold.  

  The  outcome  of  this  procedure  was  a  set  of  174  potential  argument  alternations,  

for  each  of  which  we  recorded  the  list  of  verbs  allowing  the  candidate  alternation.  

 

Page 47: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  47  

3.2.2.  Manual  identification  of  Italian  frame  alternations  

 

The   list   of   potential   argument   alternations,   however,   is   not   fully   reliable.   Part   of   the  

regularity  identified  by  means  of  correlating  frame  vectors,  indeed,  is  the  by-­‐product  of  

well-­‐known   linguistic   phenomena,   of   which   the   most   influential   is   probably   verb  

polysemy.  

  Even   though   we   based   our   work   on   the   assumption   that   a   verb   sense   can   be  

expressed   by   different   subcategorisation   frames   (Levin   1993),   it   is   true   that,   in   some  

cases,  different  frames  can  also  be  associated  with  different  senses  of  the  same  lemma  

(Roland   &   Jurafsky   2002).   For   instance,   the   verb   sentire   may   be   realised   within   the  

following   frames:   [NP_subj#V#{che}fin]   /   [NP_subj#V#{di}inf];   however,   these   two  

argument   structures   are   paired  with   two  different   senses   of   the   verb   in   question,   the  

first  of  which  corresponds  to  the  English  verb  to  hear,  while  the  second  corresponds  to  

the  English  verb  to  feel.  A  minor  consequence  of  this  phenomenon  is  that  an  argument  

alternation   valid   for   many   verbs   can   also   feature   verbs   for   which   it   is   not   so,   as  

illustrated  by  the  example  of  sentire.  

  Regular   patterns   of   verbal   polysemy,   however,   may   interest   the   whole   set   of  

verbs   that   our   automatic   procedure   associated   to   a   given   potential   argument  

alternation.   In  these  cases,   it   is   the  frame  alternation  itself   that  needs  to  be  marked  as  

incorrect  and,  eventually,  removed  from  our  dataset.  For  instance,  this  is  what  happened  

with   the   alternation   [NP_subj#V#{da}PP]   /   [NP_subj#V#{per}inf]   registered   for   the  

verbs   ripartire   and   venire:   for   both   of   these   verbs,   in   fact,   the   two   different   frames  

simply  refer  to  two  different  semantic  patterns,  the  first  one  meaning  “to  leave  a  place  

again”   and   “to   come   from   a   place”   respectively,   and   the   second   meaning   “to   head  

towards  a  destination”  and  “to  go  somewhere  to  achieve  something”  respectively.    

  Given   the   impossibility   to   handle   these   issues   automatically,   we   decided   to  

manually  inspect  our  plausible  frame  pairs,  verifying  whether  each  verb  associated  with  

a  given  alternation  was  a  proper  case  of  argument  alternation  or  not,  thus  filtering  out  

those  data  that  turned  out  to  be  inconsistent.  In  this  phase,  alternations  involving  only  

one  verb  were  ruled  out  as  well.  In  the  next  chapter  we  will  present  an  in-­‐depth  analysis  

of  our  final  results,  individually  discussing  each  alternation  and  its  peculiarity.      

 

 

Page 48: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  48  

Chapter  4  

A  descriptive  analysis  of  argument  alternations  in  Italian  

 

4.1.  Alternations  that  involve  argumental  sentences    

 

If   it   is   true   that   most   of   the   research   conducted   so   far   on   argument   realisation   has  

focused  on  arguments  as  phrases  –  either  noun  phrases  (NP)  or  prepositional  phrases  

(PP)  –,  it  is  equally  as  true  that  arguments  can  be  realised  as  subordinate  clauses,  giving  

rise   to   what   is   known   in   the   literature   as   a   “complex   sentence”   (see   Renzi,   Salvi   &  

Cardinaletti  1988,  vol.   I,   I.1.6).  Depending  on  the  verb  considered  and  the  participants  

involved  in  the  action  it  describes,  the  clause  in  question  is  introduced  by  different  types  

of  conjunctions  or  pronouns  (complementisers),  as  the  following  examples  illustrate:    

 

(1)   E’  possibile  che  Gianni  parta  domani  

  “It  is  possible  that  Gianni  leave  tomorrow”  

(2)   Gianni  ha  detto  che  partirà  domani  

  “Gianni  said  that  he  will  leave  tomorrow”  

(3)   Gianni  non  sa  chi  partirà  domani  

    “Gianni  does  not  know  who  will  leave  tomorrow”                        [Graffi  1994,  p.  115]  

 

If  we   tried   to   omit   the   dependant   clauses,  we  would   be   left  with   three   agrammatical  

sentences,  respectively:  *È  possibile,  *Gianni  ha  detto,  *Gianni  non  sa18.    This  fact  shows  

clearly   that   the   clauses   in   italics   exhibit   a   syntactic   behaviour   comparable   to   that  

typically   attributed   to   arguments,   therefore   saturating   the   valence  of   the   verbs.  Given  

this   evidence,   Graffi   suggested   that   they   should   be   considered   as   a   different   class   of  

dependant  clauses  altogether,  calling  them  “argumental  sentences”  (Graffi  1994,  p.  116)  

and   further   dividing   them   into   nominal   clauses   –   when   they   act   like   subjects   (1)   –,  

completive   clauses   –   when   they   function   as   complements,   either   direct   ones   (2)   or  

indirect   ones   –,   and   indirect   interrogative   clause   –   when   they   correspond   to   an  

interrogative  sentence  (3)  –.    

                                                                                                               18  The   first   and   third   sentences   could   be   somehow   acceptable,   but   only   in   particular  circumstances,  such  as  that  of  elliptical  constructions.    

Page 49: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  49  

In  this  section  we  will  therefore  list  and  describe  precisely  those  alternations  that  

involve   a   set   of   arguments   both   expressed   by   such   clauses,   the   analysis   of   which  

represents   an   original   contribution   in   more   than   one   way:   not   only   have   they   never  

been  described  in  relation  to  Italian,  but  not  even  Levin  (1993)  took  them  into  account  

in   her   seminal  work   that   has   inspired   the   vast  majority   of   contemporary   research   on  

argument  alternation,  including  this  thesis.  

 

4.1.1.  Alternations  involving  argumental  sentences  in  a  complement  position  

 

In  the  following  paragraphs  we  will  focus  our  attention  on  those  alternations  we  found  

involving   “argumental   sentences”   taking  place  within   the  VP,  which  we   referred   to   as  

completive  clauses.  These  clauses  can  have  the  verb  in  the  infinitive  or  finite  form;  the  

selection   of   one   of   these   two   possibilities   influences,   on   the   one   hand,   the   overt  

realisation  of  the  subject  within  the  argumental  sentence  in  question  (which  is  possible  

only  within  the  latter  option)  and,  on  the  other,  the  complementiser  chosen  to  introduce  

the  dependant  clause.      

It   is   also   important   to   note   that,   with   the   exception   of   1.1.6   and   1.1.7.,   these  

alternations   do   not   bring   about   a   change   in   the   transitivity   of   the   verb   and,  

consequently,  that  they  do  not  entail  a  change  in  the  number  of  arguments  that  a  verb  

displays.    

 

4.1.1.1.  NP_subj#V#{che}fin#{a}PP  /  NP_subj#V#{di}inf#{a}PP.  

 

In  the  first  alternation  discussed  here,  verbs  present  three  arguments:  an  external  one  

(the  subject),  a  direct  internal  one  (the  object)  and  an  indirect  internal  one  (the  dative).  

They  also  realise  their  direct   internal  argument  as  what  we  defined  as  an  “argumental  

sentence”;   however,   they   allow   two   different   ways   of   expressing   the   sentence   in  

question:    

 

(4)     a.  Ti  Auguro  che  tutto  vada  bene    

  “I  wish  (to)  you  that  everything  go  well”  

b.  Ti  auguro  di  fare  un  buon  viaggio  

  “I  wish  (to)  you  to  have  a  pleasant  journey”    

Page 50: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  50  

In   the  possibility  exemplified   in   (4a),   the  argument   is   realised  as  a  subordinate  clause  

introduced  by  the  complementiser  che  (“that”)  and  with  its  verb  in  a  finite  form;  on  the  

other   hand,   in   the   possibility   illustrated   in   (4b)   the   argument   is   expressed   as   an  

infinitive   sentence   introduced   by   the   complementiser   di   (“of”)   (Renzi,   Salvi   &  

Cardinaletti  1991,  XIII.1.1.2;  Giovanardi  1986,  pp.  107-­‐110)  and,  of  course,  with  the  verb  

in  the  infinitive  form.    

Within   our   annotated   sample,   the   alternating   verbs   are:   augurare,   garantire,  

ricordare,   assicurare,   promettere,   gridare,   confidare,   annunciare,   raccontare,   chiedere,  

comandare,   raccomandare,   dire,   dichiarare,   scrivere,   giurare,   confessare,   comunicare,  

riferire19.   Moreover,   following   Levin’s   verb   classification   (1993),   these   verbs   can   be  

grouped   into   different   semantic   sub-­‐classes   that   show   a   high   internal   semantic  

coherency  and  which  we  present  below:  

 

a.  VERBS  OF  FUTURE  HAVING:  garantire,  assicurare,  promettere,  giurare;  

b.  VERBS  OF  TRANSFER  OF  A  MESSAGE:  raccontare,  chiedere,  scrivere;  

c.    VERBS  OF  MANNER  OF  SPEAKING:  gridare;  

d.  SAY  VERBS:  confidare,  annunciare,  dire,  comunicare,  riferire;    

e.  GET  VERBS:  comandare;  

f.  DECLARE  VERBS:  dichiarare,  confessare;  

g.  CHARACHTERISE  VERBS:  ricordare,  raccomandare;  

h.  LONG  VERBS:  augurare.  

 

However,   these   verbs   could   be   classified   in   a   slightly   different   way   if   we   took   as   a  

relevant  parameter  the  possibility  of  a  verb  to  have,  in  the  realisation  introduced  by  che,  

the   verb   in   the   subjunctive   form   rather   than   in   the   indicative   form.   In   fact,   this  

distinction   is   strictly   related   to   the   modality   implied   by   each   verb,   namely   the  

commitment   of   the   speaker   towards   his   or   her   own   utterances   (Lyons   1977):   the  

indicative   mood   is   used   in   so-­‐called   “factual   utterances”,   namely   sentences   that   the  

speaker  considers  to  be  either  true  or  untrue.  On  the  contrary,  the  subjunctive  mood  is  

used  in  so-­‐called  “nonfactual  utterances”,  namely  those  sentences  in  which  the  speaker  

suspends  his  or  her  judgement  in  relation  to  the  truth  of  the  sentence.                                                                                                                  19  To  wish,  to  guarantee,  to  remind,  to  assure,  to  promise,  to  shout,  to  confide,  to  announce,  to  tell,  to   ask,   to   order,   to   recommend,   to   say,   to   declare,   to   permit,   to   write,   to   swear,   to   confess,   to  communicate,  to  report.  

Page 51: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  51  

4.1.1.2.  NP_subj#V#{che}fin  /  NP_subj#V#{di}inf  

 

The  second  alternation  can  be  considered  a  variation  of  the  one  described  above,  with  

the  only  difference  that  verbs  that  present  this  alternation  have  only  two  arguments:  an  

external  one  (the  subject)  and  a  direct  internal  one  (the  object).  However,  as  for  the  one  

in   1.1.1.,   the   alternation   involves   a   twofold  way   of   expressing   the   internal   argument,  

realised  in  both  cases  as  an  argumental  sentence:  

 

(5)   a.  La  situazione  impone  che  tutti  partecipino  

  “The  situation  requires  that  everyone  get  involved”  

b.  La  situazione  impone  di  essere  uniti  

  “The  situation  requires  to  stick  together”  

 

The   two   argumental   sentences   allowed   are   akin   to   those   analysed   in   4.1.1.1.:   a  

dependant  clause  introduced  by  che  and  with  the  verb  in  the  subjunctive  form  in  (5a),  

and  an   infinitive  clause   introduced  by  the  complementiser  di   in  (5b).  According  to  our  

results,   this   alternation   is   allowed   by   the   following   verbs:   ignorare,   disporre,   scoprire,  

tacere,  imporre,  badare,  escludere,  vedere,  riscoprire,  protestare,  stabilire,  intuire,  gridare,  

temere,   confidare,   sopportare,   constatare,   supporre,   tollerare,   annunciare,   pensare,  

ammettere,   deliberare,   immaginare,   dubitare,   fingere,   sapere,   convenire,   ipotizzare,  

nascondere,   smentire,   esigere,   ritenere,   sperare,   pretendere,   dire,   aspettare,   riconoscere,  

dichiarare,   credere,   dimenticare,   sostenere,   aggiungere,   prescrivere,   ottenere,   decidere,  

negare,  accettare,  dimostrare,  sognare,  testimoniare,  rivelare20.  A  number  of  observations  

can  be  made:  

 

a.  There   is   a   group  of   verbs   that   allow  also   the  alternation   in  4.1.1.1.,   all   belonging   to  

either   the  VERBS  OF  MANNER  OF  SPEAKING  class  or   to   the  SAY  VERBS  class:  gridare,  

confidare,   annunciare,   dire,   dichiarare.   Obviously,   since   they   all   refer   to   the   action   of  

speaking,  they  semantically  imply  an  interlocutor,  somebody  to  whom  something  is  said:                                                                                                                  20  To   ignore,   to   dispose,   to   discover,   to   omit,   to   require,   to   care   for,   to   count   out,   to   see,   to  rediscover,   to  protest,   to   establish,   to  grasp,   to   shout,   to   fear,   to   confide,   to  bear,   to  ascertain,   to  presume,  to  tolerate,  to  announce,  to  think,  to  acknowledge,  to  deliberate,  to  imagine,  to  doubt,  to  pretend,  to  know,  to  agree,  to  suppose,  to  hide,  to  retract,  to  demand,  to  consider,  to  hope,  to  expect,  to   say,   to   wait,   to   recognize,   to   declare,   to   believe,   to   forget,   to   maintain,   to   add,   prescribe,   to  obtain,  to  decide,  to  deny,  to  accept,  to  demonstrate,  to  dream,  to  testify,  to  reveal.    

Page 52: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  52  

however,  depending  on  the  context,  this  argument  can  be  expressed  (see  4.1.1.1.)  or  not  

(see  above).  

 

b.  A  second  group  is  composed  of  those  verbs  that,  just  like  in  (5a)  and  (5b),  allow  this  

alternation   without   implying   a   necessary   co-­‐reference   between   the   subject  

(grammatical  and  logical)  of  the  main  verb  and  that  of  the  dependant  clause,  since  the  

verb   does   not   exert   any   necessary   control   over   the   latter.   These   verbs   are   disporre,  

imporre,   stabilire,   impedire,   prescrivere,   decidere,   and,   in   the   infinitive   option,   they   all  

entail  a  generic  reference,  which,  in  fact,  does  not  need  to  be  syntactically  realised:  

 

(6)   a.  Il  codice  prescrive  di  essere  prudenti  

  “The  code  prescribes  to  be  cautious”  

  b.  Il  codice  prescrive  che  la  domanda  sia  fatta  in  carta  bollata    

  “The  code  prescribes  that  the  request  be  sent  on  stamped  paper”  

 

c.  A   third  group  arises   in  opposition   to   the   second  one  and   it   consists  of   all   the  other  

verbs   left   out   until   now:   ignorare,   scoprire,   tacere,  attendere,  badare,  escludere,  vedere,  

riscoprire,  protestare,  intuire,  temere,  sopportare,  constatare,  supporre,  tollerare,  pensare,  

ammettere,   deliberare,   immaginare,   dubitare,   fingere,   sapere,   ipotizzare,   nascondere,  

smentire,   esigere,   ritenere,   sperare,   pretendere,   ipotizzare,  nascondere,   smentire,   esigere,  

ritenere,   sperare,   pretendere,   aspettare,   riconoscere,   credere,   dimenticare,   sostenere,  

aggiungere,   ottenere,   negare,   accettare,   dimostrare,   sognare,   testimoniare,   rivelare.  

Despite   the   heterogeneity   of   this   list,   all   these   verbs   have   one   fundamental   semantic  

aspect   in   common   that   explains   why   they   can   be   clustered   together:   the   actions  

described   by   them   cannot   be   transferred   onto   other   referents   maintaining   the   same  

truth   value   conditions,   since   the   verb   controls   the   embedded   subjects,   which,  

consequently,   has   to   coincide   with   that   of   the   infinitive   clause   (See   Serianni   1989,  

XIV.35-­‐36):    

 

(7)   Mia  sorella  sostiene  di  cucinare  molto  bene  

  “My  sister  claims  to  cook  very  well”  

 

Page 53: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  53  

A  sentence  like  the  one  in  (7)  can  only  be  interpreted  as  “My  sister  thinks  that  she  cooks  

well”  and,  in  Italian,  no  other  referent  could  be  indicated  or  suggested  as  the  controlled  

subject  of  the  infinitive  dependant  clause.  

Moreover,   another   peculiarity   of   the   verbs   listed   in   b.   and   c.   is   that,   in   the  

infinitive   realisation,   some   of   them   allow   the   presence   of   a   PP   introduced   by   {a},   as  

shown  in  (8):  

 

(8)   Il  rumore  ci  impedisce  di  dormire  

  “The  noise  impedes  (to)  us  to  sleep”    

 

If  we  integrated  this  property  as  a  valid  parameter  for  a  finer-­‐grained  sub-­‐classification  

of  the  verbs  presented  in  b.  and  c.,  we  would  have  the  following  distribution  (Fig.  1):  

 

Parameters   {a}PP     *{a}PP  

Co-­‐reference   of   the   subjects   in  

the  infinitive  form  

Tacere,   ammettere,  

nascondere,   negare,  

dimostrare,  rivelare  

Ignorare,   scoprire,   attendere,  

badare,   escludere,   vedere,  

riscoprire,   protestare,   intuire,  

temere,   sopportare,  

constatare,   supporre,  

tollerare,   pensare,   deliberare,  

immaginare,  dubitare,   fingere,  

sapere,   ipotizzare,   smentire,  

esigere,   ritenere,   sperare,  

pretendere,   aspettare,  

riconoscere,   credere,  

dimenticare,   sostenere,  

aggiungere,   ottenere,  

accettare,   sognare,  

testimoniare,  rivelare  

Unrequired  co-­‐reference  of   the  

subjects  in  the  infinitive  form  

Imporre,   impedire,  

prescrivere  

Disporre,  stabilire,  decidere  

 Table  6:  A  finer-­‐grained  classification  of  verbs  in  b.  and  c.  in  the  infinitive  realisation  

 

Page 54: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  54  

4.1.1.3.  NP_subj#V#{che}fin  /  NP_subj#V#{come}fin  

 

A   similar   alternation   to   the   one   discussed   above   is   the   one   presented   in   this   section,  

which  is  illustrated  by  the  following  sentences:  

 

(9)   a.  La  maestra  ha  notato  che  gli  studenti  erano  stanchi  

  “The  teacher  noticed  that  the  students  were-­‐indic  tired”  

b.  La  maestra  ha  notato  come  gli  studenti  fossero  stanchi  

  “The  teacher  noticed  how  the  students  were-­‐subj  tired”  

 

With   regard   to   the   first   realisation,   the   only   difference  with   the   corresponding   clause  

examined   in  1.1.3.   is   that,  here,   the  mood  required   is   the   indicative  (erano).  As   for   the  

second  possibility  allowed  by  this  alternation,  namely  the  one  in  (9b),  we  find  another  

completive  clause,  not  an  infinitive  one:  this  clause  is  introduced  by  typically  explicative  

conjunctions  and  adverbs,  such  as  come,  and  it  requires  the  subjunctive  mood  (fossero).    

The  fact  that  this  alternation  is,  at  a  deeper  analysis,  quite  different  from  the  one  

presented  in  1.1  is  confirmed  also  by  the  verbs  that  present  the  one  we  are  discussing  

here  and  that  are  not   found  in  the  classes  of  verbs  that  allow  the  one  examined   in  the  

first   paragraph.   Based   on   our   results,   these   verbs   are:   provare,   sottolineare,   notare,  

concepire,  ricordare,  vedere,  giudicare,  imparare,  sapere,  intendere,  stabilire,  prevedere21.  

Once   again,   there   is   a   striking   semantic   consistency   among   these   verbs   and,   still  

Following  Levin  (1993),  we  believe  that  they  can  be  grouped  in  the  classes  listed  below:  

 

a.  DECLARE  VERBS:  provare,  sottolineare,  giudicare;  

b.  CONJECTURE  VERBS:  notare,  concepire,  vedere,  sapere,  intendere,  prevedere;  

c.  CHARACTERISE  VERBS:  ricordare,  stabilire;  

d.  LEARN  VERBS:  imparare.  

 

 

 

                                                                                                                 21  To  prove,  to  stress,  to  note,  to  conceive,  to  remember,  to  see  (not  to  be  construed  as  a  perception  verb  though,  but,  metaphorically,  as  “to  understand”),  to  judge,  to  learn,  to  know,  to  understand,  to  establish,  to  foresee.  

Page 55: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  55  

4.1.1.4.  NP_subj#V#{che}fin#{a}PP  /  NP_subj#V#{come}fin#{a}PP  

 

The   fourth   alternation  we   present   is   similar   to   the   one   in   4.1.1.1.  with   respect   to   the  

valence  of  the  verbs  that  allow  it  (three  arguments:  an  external  one,  a  direct  internal  one  

and  an  indirect  internal  one).  However,  this  is  pretty  much  all  they  have  in  common,  as  

the  examples  below  show:  

 

(10)   a.  Il  poliziotto  ha  spiegato  agli  studenti  che  l’autocontrollo  è  vitale  

  “The  policeman  has  explained  that  self-­‐control  is  vital  to  the  students”  

b.  Il  poliziotto  ha  spiegato  agli  studenti  come  l’autocontrollo  sia  vitale  agli  

“The  policeman  has  explained  how  self-­‐control  be-­‐subj  vital  to  the  students”  

 

The  verbs  that,   in  our  sample,  present  this  alternation  are:  spiegare  and  mostrare22.  As  

the  examples  above  suggest,  the  only  difference  with  the  one  discussed  in  4.1.1.3.  is  the  

presence  here  of  a  third  core  argument,  realised  as  {a}PP  and  typically  referring  to  the  

person  or  group  to  whom  something  is  explained  or  shown.    

 

4.1.1.5.  NP_subj#V-­‐si#{che}fin  /  NP_subj#V-­‐si#{di}inf  

 

This  alternation  differs   from  the  ones  discussed  so   far   in  respect   to   the  morphological  

form  of  the  verbs  that  allow  it:  they  are  all  reflexive  verbs,  namely  verbal  forms  in  which  

an   unstressed   clitic   pronoun   accompanies   the   verb,   becoming   a   whole   with   it   (see  

Serianni  1989,  XI.18-­‐29).    

 

(11)   a.  Il  calciatore  si  dispiace  che  la  squadra  abbia  perso  

  “The  footballer  is  sorry-­‐pron  that  the  team  lost-­‐subj”  

b.  Il  calciatore  si  dispiace-­‐pron  di  aver  perso    

  “The  footballer  is  sorry  to  have  lost”  

 

 As   the   examples   in   (11b)   shows,   the   relation   between   the   subject   (both   logical   and  

grammatical)   of   the   main   clause   and   the   one   in   the   infinitive   clause   is   the   same  

described   in   4.1.1.2.,   namely   an   implied   co-­‐reference.   Moreover,   also   the   sentence   in                                                                                                                  22  To  explain,  to  show.  

Page 56: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  56  

(11a)   confirms  what  we   said   above   in   relation   to   the  possibility  of   the   two   clauses   to  

have   two   different   subjects   (once   again,   both   grammatical   and   logical)   only   if   the  

dependant  one  is  an  explicit  subordinate.      

The   verbs   that,   according   to   our   analysis,   appeared   to   allow   this   alternation   are:  

convincersi,   augurarsi,   assicurarsi,   illudersi,   ricordarsi,   sorprendersi,   immaginarsi,  

dispiacersi,  attendersi,  aspettarsi,  accorgersi,  sognarsi23.      

It  is  worth  mentioning  the  fact  that,  even  though  all  these  verbs  exhibit  the  same  

behaviour   with   regard   to   the   alternation   discussed   here,   further   distinctions   can   be  

made  between  them.  With  the  exceptions  of  accorgersi,  for  which  the  pronoun  does  not  

carry  any  specific  value  but   is   simply  a   formal  component  of   the  verb,  and  dispiacersi,  

which   has   the   form   dispiacere   but   used   only   as   an   impersonal   verb   (see   4.1.2.3.),   all  

these  verbs  present  also  the  standard  form  without  the  unstressed  pronoun.  The  most  

interesting   thing   about   this   twofold   realisation   is   the   different   function   that   the  

pronoun,  depending  on  the  meaning  of  the  verb,  carries  out  in  the  pronominal  variant,  

which   can   have   noteworthy   consequences   in   relation   to   the   value   of   the   argumental  

sentence.  Based  on  the  argument  structure  of  the  verbs  listed  above,  the  following  sub-­‐

classes  can  in  fact  be  individuated:  

 

a.  NP_subj#V#NP_obj:   immaginare,  attendere,  aspettarsi,  sognare.  Verbs   like   these   take  

the  pronominal  form  which,  however,  does  not  affect  the  argument  structure,  since  they  

all  remain  transitive,  as  shown  in  (12):  

 

(12)   a.  Stava  attendendo  il  figlio  

  “He  was  waiting  his  son”  

  b.  Si  attendeva  di  essere  premiato  /  che  lo  premiassero  

  “He  expected-­‐pron  to  be  awarded  /  that  they  awarded-­‐subj  him”  

 

As   for   the   semantic   content,   the   pronoun   si   does   not   entail   any   major   shift   in   the  

meaning   conveyed;   however,   it   does   indicate   a   greater   emotional   involvement   of   the  

subject  (intensive  si);        

 

                                                                                                               23  To  convince,  to  wish,  to  assure,  to  delude,  to  remind,  to  surprise  (oneself),  to  imagine,  to  expect,  to  notice,  to  dream.    

Page 57: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  57  

b.  NP_subj#V#NP_obj:  sorprendere.  This  case  is  different  from  the  ones  in  a.  because  the  

pronominal  form  prompts  a  drastic  change  in  the  structure  of  the  verb,  which  not  only  

becomes  intransitive,  but  also  requires  a  new  argument  realised  as  a  PP  or,  in  this  case,  

as  an  argumental  sentence  introduced  by  the  complementiser  {di}:  

 

(13)   a.  La  sua  risposta  ha  sorpreso  tutti  

  “His  answer  surprised  everyone”  

  b.  Ci  sorprendemmo  di  vederlo  ritornare  /  che  finisse  così  

  “We  surprised-­‐pron  to  see  him  coming  back  /  that  it  would  end  like  this”  

     

c.   NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{a}PP:   augurare,   assicurare,   ricordare,.   In   these   cases,   the  

pronoun  in  the  pronominal  form  takes  the  role  of  the  {a}PP  in  the  non  pronominal  one,  

and  the  argumental  sentence  that  of  NP_obj  (indirect  reflexive  verbs):  

 

(14)   a.  Ti  ricordo  la  promessa  fatta    

  “I  remind  (to)  you  the  promise  you  made”  

b.  Mi  ricordai  che  avevo  un  appuntamento  /  Si  ricorda  sempre  di  farmi  gli  auguri  

“I  remembered-­‐pron  that  I  had  an  appointment”  /  “She  always  remembers  to  wish  

me  happy  birthday”  

 

d.  NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{di}PP:  illudere,  convincere.  In  relation  to  such  verbs,  the  pronoun  

of   the   reflexive   form   indicates   the   NP_obj   of   the   standard   one,   and   the   argumental  

sentence  works  as  the  {di}PP  (direct  reflexive  verbs):  

 

(15)   a.  Convincerò  i  colleghi  dell’opportunità  del  provvedimento  

“I  will  convince  my  workmates  of  the  convenience  of  the  measure  

b.  Mi  convinsi  di  aver  sbagliato  /  Ci  siamo  convinti  che  l’imputato  è  innocente  

“I   convinced-­‐pron   to   have   done   something   wrong   /   We   convinced-­‐pron   that   the  

accused  is  innocent    

 

 

 

 

Page 58: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  58  

4.1.1.6.  NP_subj#V#{come}fin#{a}PP  /  NP_subj#V-­‐si#{come}fin  

 

As  we  briefly  anticipated  at  the  start  of  this  section,  this  alternation  implies  a  change  in  

the  syntactic  valence  of  the  verb:  

 

(16)   a.  Ti  spiego  come  si  fa  

  “I  will  explain  to  you  how  it  is  done”  

  b.  Ora  mi  spiego  come  mai  non  mi  saluta  

  “Now  I  explain-­‐pron  how  he  doesn’t  say  hi  to  me”  

 

The  only  two  verbs  in  our  annotated  sample  that  allow  this  alternation  are:  spiegare  and  

domandare24 ,   two   illocutionary   verbs25  belonging   to   the   broad   class   of   VERBS   OF  

COMMUNICATION   (Levin   1993).   As   the   examples   above   illustrate,   the   realisation   in  

(16a)  presents  three  arguments:  a  subject,  namely  the  person  or  group  who  initiates  the  

communicative   act,   a   direct   object,   namely   what   is   communicated,   and   an   indirect  

object,   which   refers   to   the   interlocutor   to   whom   something   is   communicated.  

Furthermore,   the   direct   object   is   expressed   as   a   dependant   clause   introduced   by   an  

interrogative  pronoun  or  conjunction,  such  as  come  (“how”),  whereas  the  indirect  one  is  

realised  as  a  PP   introduced  by   the  preposition  a   (“to”).   In   the  realisation   in   (16b),   the  

verb   takes   the   pronominal   form   and   has   only   two   arguments:   a   subject   and   a   direct  

object,  which  is  still  realised  as  a  subordinate.  The  indirect  object,  on  the  other  hand,  is  

represented   by   the   pronoun   si,   which,   in   this   case,   acts   precisely   as   the   interlocutor  

otherwise  expressed  by  the  PP,  as  the  paraphrase  of  (16b)  in  (17)  demonstrates:  

 

(17)   Ora  spiego  a  me  stesso  come  mai  non  mi  saluta  

  “Now  I  explained  to  myself  how  he  doesn’t  say  hi  to  me”  

 

Verbs   that  show  this  particular  syntactic  and  semantic  construction  are  called   indirect  

reflexives  (see  Serianni  1989,  XI.  21).  

 

                                                                                                                 24  To  explain  and  to  ask.  25  “Illocutionary.   Applied   in   the   theory   of   speech   acts   to   the   force   that   an   expression   of   some  specific  form  will  have  when  it  is  uttered.”  (Matthews  1997  (2007),  p.  184).  

Page 59: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  59  

4.1.1.7  NP_subj#V#{di}inf#{a}PP  /  NP_subj#V-­‐si#{di}inf  

 

This  alternation  is  very  similar  to  the  one  discussed  in  4.1.1.6  in  that  it  implies  a  change  

in  the  syntactic  verb  valency:  

 

(18)   a.  Ha  permesso  al  figlio  di  uscire  

  “He  let  his  son  to  go  out”  

  b.  Si  permette  di  andare  in  vacanza  dove  vuole  

  “She  affords-­‐pron  to  go  on  holiday  wherever  she  wants”  

 

The  verbs  in  our  sample  that  allowed  this  alternation  are:  proporre,  permettere,  imporre,  

augurare,   assicurare,   offrire,   ricordare,   impedire,   rimproverare,   risparmiare 26 .   Even  

though   these  verbs  could  be  ascribed   to  different  classes,   they  all   refer   to  actions   that  

necessarily   entail   an   affected   participant   expressed   as   a   PP   introduced   by   the  

preposition   {a},   as   illustrated   in   (18a).   In   the   pronominal   form,   this   argument   is   not  

present  syntactically,  but,  as  for  4.1.1.6,  it  is  still  semantically  available  precisely  in  the  

pronoun  si,  which  co-­‐refers  to  the  subject,  as  the  paraphrase  of  (18b)  in  (19)  shows:  

 

(19)   Permette  a  se  stessa  di  andare  in  vacanza  dove  vuole  

  “She  affords  to  herself  to  go  on  holiday  wherever  she  wants”      

 

Even  in  this  case,  the  verbs  that  allow  for  this  alternation  are  indirect  reflexives.    

 

4.1.2.  Alternations  involving  argumental  sentences  in  the  subject  position  

 

In   the   following   paragraphs   we   will   deal   with   those   alternations   we   found   involving  

argumental  sentences  taking  place  in  the  subject  position.  In  all  the  cases  presented,  an  

argumental  clause  occupies  the  subject  position  (usually  filled  with  a  noun),  and  all  the  

verbs  that  allow  the  syntactic  structures  discussed  below  are  unaccusative  intransitive  

verbs.   They   also   act   as   impersonal   verbs27,   thus   taking   only   a   third   person   singular  

inflection.    

                                                                                                               26  To  propose,  to  permit,  to  impose,  wish,  to  assure,  to  offer,  to  remind,  to  impede,  to  scold,  to  spare.  27  “[…]  constructions  lacking  a  referential  subject”  (Malchukov  &  Ogawa  2011,  p.  20).  

Page 60: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  60  

Moreover,  all  the  alternations  we  found  allow  for  an  infinitive  sentence  (which  is  either  

introduced   by   the   complementiser   di   or   by   the   0   complementiser)   and   a   finite   one    

(which  is  always  introduced  by  the  complementiser  che).  The  selection  of  one  or  other  

of  the  options  depends,  of  course,  on  the  possibility  “to  refer  the  semantic  content  of  the  

nominal   clause   to   an   entity,   which,   in   this   case,   is   syntactically   expressed   as   a   noun  

phrase”   (Rensi,   Salvi   &   Cardinaletti   1991,   p.   665),   and   which,   of   course,   takes   the  

position  of  the  subject  within  the  argumental  sentence.    

 

4.1.2.1.  NP_subj{che}fin#V  /  NP_subj{di}inf#V  

 

In   this   alternation,   the   argument   that   can   be   expressed   in   two   ways   is   the   one   that  

functions  as  the  subject  of  the  main  verb:    

 

(20)     a.  Pare  di  non  ottenere  nessun  risultato  

  “Seems-­‐impers  to  not  achieve  any  results”  

b.  Pare  che  nessun  risultato  sia  ottenibile    

  “Seems-­‐impers  that  no  result  is  achievable”  

 

As  these  examples  suggest,  the  argumental  sentences  in  (20a)  and  (20b)  act  as  syntactic  

subjects  of  the  verbs  in  the  main  clause,  and  they  always  come  after  the  main  verb28.  

One   last   thing   to   note   is   that,   within   the   argumental   sentences   in   question,   in  

order   to  maintain   the   impersonality   value   expressed   by   (20a),   the  NP-­‐object   in   (20a)  

moves  to  the  NP-­‐subject  position  in  (20b).  Furthermore,  it  is  worth  underlining  the  fact  

that   the   mood   required   in   (20b)   is   always   the   subjunctive   (see   Renzi,   Salvi   &  

Cardinaletti  1991,  XIII.1.2.4.6).    

There  are  only  three  verbs  in  our  survey  that  present  this  alternation:  sembrare,  

parere,   accadere29.   Levin   (1993)   does   not   deal   with   these   verbs   in   respect   to   their  

impersonal  senses30,  thus  she  did  not  establish  any  semantic  class  for  this  type  of  verbs.  

                                                                                                               28  See  the  agrammaticality  of  sentences  such  as  “*[Di  non  ottenere  nessun  risultato]  pare”  (see  Renzi,  Salvi  &  Cardinaletti  1988,  vol.  II,  XIII.1.2.4.4).  29  To  appear,  to  seem,  to  happen.  30  To  appear  is  classified  among  the  APPEAR  VERBS,  which  “describe  the  appearance  of  an  entity  on   the   scene”   (Levin   1993,   p.   258),   whereas   to   happen   is   ascribed   to   the   VERBS   OF  OCCURRENCE  class,  which  “describe  the  occurrence  of  an  event”  (Levin  1993,  p.  261).  The  verb  to  seem  is  not  even  included  in  her  survey.  

Page 61: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  61  

However,  we  feel  that,  in  relation  to  Italian,  one  is  much  needed  and  we  propose  to  call  it  

HAPPEN  VERBS.    

 

4.1.2.2.  Alternation  NP_subj{0}inf#V  /  NP_subj{che}fin#V  

 

A   very   similar,   almost   identical,   alternation   to   the   one   described   in   the   previous  

paragraph  is  the  one  shown  in  the  following  examples:  

 

(21)   a.  Bisogna  raccogliere  i  soldi  

  “Needs-­‐impers  to  collect  the  money”  

b.  Bisogna  che  i  soldi  siano  raccolti  

  “Needs-­‐impers  that  the  money  be  collected”  

 

This  alternation  differs   from  the  one  examined  in  4.1.2.1.  with  respect   to  the   infinitive  

clause  in  (21a):  here,  we  have  a  zero  infinitive  clause  (or  bare  infinitive  clause),  namely  

a  sentence  whose  verb  is  an  infinitive  not  preceded  by  any  complementiser.    As  for  the  

variation   in   (20b),   the   impersonality   aspect   is   once   again   preserved   by   moving   the  

NP_obj   of   the   argument   clause   in   (21a)   to   the   subject   position   of   the   same   clause   in  

(21b),  as  we  discussed  in  relation  to  4.1.2.1.    

The   verbs   in   our   sample   that   present   this   alternation   are   only   two:   occorrere   e  

bisognare31.   The   semantic   coherency   of   these   verbs   is   so   blatantly   strong   that   we  

propose  to  establish  a  different  class  for  them,  called  NEEDS  IMPERSONAL  VERBS.  

 

4.1.2.3.  Alternation  NP_subj{0}inf#V#{a}PP  /  NP_subj{che}fin#V#{a}PP  

 

Even  though  the  alternation  analysed  here  might  seem  very  similar  to  the  one  discussed  

above,   this   is   actually  not   the   case.   If   anything,   it   is   closer   to   the  one  we  presented   in  

4.1.2.1.,   even   if,   here,   the   presence   of   the   indirect   internal   argument   realised   as   a   PP  

introduced   by   the   preposition   a   adds   the   experiencer   of   the   action   expressed   by   the  

main  verb:  

 

                                                                                                                 31  To  need,  to  be  necessary.  

Page 62: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  62  

(22)   a.  A  noi  conviene  partire  subito    

  “To  us  mattersimpers  to  leave  immediately”    

b.  A  noi  conviene  che  tu  parta  subito      

  “To  us  mattersimpers  that  you  leavesubj  immediately”  

   

From   the  analysis  of  our  data,   it   emerged   that   the  verbs  allowing   this  alternation  are:  

dispiacere,  convenire,  risultare32.  Given  the  fact  that,  in  English,  these  verbs  act  in  a  very  

different   way,   it   does   not   come   as   a   surprise   that   they   are   not   dealt   with   by   Levin  

(1993);  however,  as  for  the  previous  cases,  we  believe  that  they  deserve  to  be  ascribed  

to  a  semantic  class  and  we  propose  HAPPEN  VERBS  WITH  A  PP.  

 

4.2.  Alternations  that  involve  noun  or  prepositional  phrases  (NP  or  PP)    

 

In   this  second  section  we  present   the  alternations  we   found  that,  contrary  to   the  ones  

presented   in   the   first  part  of   this  chapter,   involve  noun  phrases   (NN)  or  prepositional  

phrases  (PP),  as  illustrated  by  the  examples  below:    

 

(23)   Gianni  ha  visto  la  sua  amica  con  un  binocolo  (NP)  

  “Gianni  has  seen  his  friend  with  a  binoculars”  (NP)  

(24)   Gianni  ha  visto  la  sua  amica  con  un  binocolo  (PP)  

  “Gianni  has  seen  his  friend  with  a  binoculars”  (PP)                   [Graffi  1994,  p.  89]  

 

This   kind   of   alternation   is   by   far   the  most   studied   cross-­‐linguistically   and   “they   have  

been   a   mainstay   of   syntactic   research   since   the   beginning   of   generative   grammar”  

(Dowty  2000,  p.  111).  These  alternations  cause  either  a  different  syntactic  realisation  of  

the  participants  involved  in  the  event  described  by  the  predicate  (as  in  (25),  where  the  

subject  position  is  occupied  by  the  Agent  in  a.  and  by  the  Location  in  b.),  or  a  change  in  

the  valence  of  the  verb  (as  in  (26)  where  the  predicate  is  transitive  in  a.  and  intransitive  

in  b.):    

 

                                                                                                               32  To  be  sorry,  to  suit,  to  result.  However,  it  is  important  to  stress  that,  in  Italian,  these  verbs  can  only  be  impersonal,  with  the  experiencer  always  realised  as  dative.    

Page 63: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  63  

(25)   a.  Bees  are  swarming  in  the  garden  

  b.  The  garden  is  swarming  with  bees       [Salkoff  1983,  p.  288]  

 

(26)   a.  Janet  broke  the  vase  

  b.  Crystal  vases  break  easily                            [Dowty  2001,  p.  179]  

 

In   this   section  we   present   the   results   of   our   analysis   in   relation   to   these   types   of   so-­‐

called  “classical  argument  alternations”,  providing  new  data  for  Italian,  which,  up  until  

now,  still  consist  only  of   the  works  of   Jezek  (2003),  Lenci  (2009),  Lenci  (in  press)  and  

Cennamo  (forthcoming).  

 

4.2.1.  Alternations  causing  a  change  in  the  transitivity  of  the  verbs  

 

Regardless   of   the   idiosyncratic   peculiarities   of   the   alternations   presented   in   this   first  

part,  there  is  a  common  thread  that  makes  it  possible  to  cluster  them  all  together:  in  fact,  

in  all  of   them  the  verbs,  originally   transitive,   turn   into  syntactically  unaccusative  ones  

taking  the  pronominal  form33.  In  the  next  paragraphs  we  will  therefore  go  through  each  

and  every  one  of  these  alternations,  focusing  on  their  specific  characteristics.    

 

4.2.1.1.  NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{da}PP  /  NP_subj#V-­‐si#{da}PP  

 

In  the  first  option  of  this  alternation  (27a),  the  verb  has  three  arguments  (an  NP  subject,  

an   NP   object,   and   a   {da}PP);   in   the   second   option   (27b),   the   verb   actually   becomes  

unaccusative,  taking  the  pronominal  form  indicated  by  the  presence  of  the  pronoun  si:  

 

(27)   a.  Hai  buttato  i  sassi  dalla  finestra  

“You  threw  stones  from  the  window”  

b.  Lui  si  è  buttato  dal  trampolino  

  “He  jumped-­‐pron  from  the  trampoline”  

                                                                                                               33  For  a  discussion  on  the  relation  between  pronominal  verbs   in   Italian  and  unaccusativity  see  Jezek  (2003),  III.1.2.  

Page 64: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  64  

The  verbs  in  our  sample  that  allow  for  this  alternation  are:  rilanciare,  buttare,  escludere,  

difendere,  gettare,  dividere,   staccare,   spostare,   lanciare,   sciogliere,  allontanare,   sollevare,  

distrarre,   trarre,   ritirare,   levare,   sfilare,   separare,   liberare,   ritrarre,   riparare,   salvare34.  

Given   the   semantic   coherency   of   these   verbs,   it   is   not   surprising   that   they   can   be  

grouped  into  well  definite  sub-­‐classes,  once  again  based  on  those  found  in  Levin  (1993):  

 

a.  THROW  VERBS:  rilanciare,  buttare,  gettare,  lanciare;  

b.   REMOVE   VERBS:   escludere,   difendere,   dividere,   staccare,   spostare,   sciogliere,  

allontanare,  sollevare,  distrarre,  trarre,  ritirare,  levare,  sfilare,  separare,  liberare,  ritrarre,  

riparare,  salvare.    

The   verbs   in   the   first   class   describe   situations   in   which   an   entity   is   suddenly   set   in  

motion   and   then  moves  without   the   help   of   the   agent   that   originated   the   action.   This  

entity   is   realised  as  an  object   in   (27a)  and  as  a   subject   in   (27b).   In  both  cases,   the  PP  

introduced  by  the  preposition  da  (“from”)  indicates  the  starting  point  of  the  action,  the  

SOURCE35.  The  verbs  belonging  to  the  second  class,  on  the  other  hand,  describe  actions  

in  which  an  entity  is  removed  from  either  a  physical  place,  as  in  (28a),  or  a  situation,  as  

in    (28b)  (again  realised  as  a  PP  introduced  by  da):  

 

(28)   a.  Allontana  la  sedia  dal  muro!  

  “(You)  remove  the  chair  from  the  wall!”  

b.  Allontanati  dai  pericoli!    

  “(You)  remove-­‐pron  from  dangers!”  

 

One   last   point   worth   stressing   is   that,   in   Italian,   all   the   verbs   listed   are,   in   the  

pronominal   variant   and   only   with   an   agentive   subject,   direct   reflexive   verbs,   namely  

verbs  that  describe  actions  “which  the  subject  carries  out  on  themself,  treating  himself  

or  herself   as  object”   (Lepschy  1986,  p.  12).  This  means   that  a   finer-­‐graded  distinction  

has  to  be  made  between  those  verbs  that  allow  only  for  an  agentive  subject,  and  those  

that   do   not,   allowing   for   both   an   agentive   and   a   non-­‐agentive   subject.   In   fact,   in   the  

                                                                                                               34  To   throw   again,   to   throw   out,   to   exclude,   to   defend,   to   toss,   to   divide,   to   unplug,   to  move,   to  throw,   to   untie,   to   remove,   to   lift,   to   distract,   to   pull,   to   pull   back,   to   take   away,   to   pull   out,   to  separate,  to  free,  to  withdraw,  to  shelter,  to  save.    35  See  VerbNet  Annotation  Guidelines,  p.  21   (downloadable  at  http://verbs.colorado.edu/verb-­‐index/).    

Page 65: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  65  

former   case,   verbs   are   and   can   only   be   direct   reflexives,   whereas,   in   the   latter,   two  

options  are  given:  a  direct  reflexive  one  when  the  subject  is  agentive,  and  an  intransitive  

pronominal  one  when  the  subject  is  an  inanimate  non-­‐agentive  entity.  Considering  this  

new  parameter,  the  following  classification  is  also  possible  and  valid:  

 

I.   DIRECT   REFLEXIVE   VERBS:   rilanciare,   buttare,   gettare,   lanciare,   escludere,   difendere,  

distrarre,  trarre,  ritirare,  levare,  separare,  liberare,  ritrarre,  riparare,  salvare.  These  verbs  

always  entail  an  animate  agentive  subject  and,  in  the  pronominal  form,  even  though  they  

syntactically   belong   to   the   class   of   unaccusative   verbs,   their   semantic   valency   is   still  

somehow   transitive,   with   the   pronoun   si   acting   as   the   object   and   co-­‐referring   to   the  

same   entity   of   the   subject.   It   follows   that   a   sentence   like   (29)   can   be   paraphrased   as  

shown  in  (30):  

 

(29)   Il  suicida  si  è  gettato  dalla  finestra  

  “The  suicide  victim  threw-­‐pron  from  the  window  

(30)   Il  suicida  ha  gettato  se  stesso  dalla  finestra  

  “The  suicide  victim  threw  himself  from  the  window”  

 

II.  DIRECT  REFLEXIVE/INTRANSITIVE  PRONOMINAL  VERBS:  dividere,  staccare,  spostare,  sciogliere,  

allontanare,   sollevare,   sfilare.   Depending   on   the   agentivity   of   the   noun   filler   in   the  

subject  slot,   in  the  pronominal  realisation  these  verbs  can  be  direct  reflexive,   in  which  

case  the  pronoun  si  does  act  as  a  semantic  object  co-­‐referring  with  the  subject  (28b),  but  

they   can   also   be   intransitive   pronominal   verbs,   giving   rise   to   a   causative-­‐inchoative  

alternation  in  which  a  sentence  like  (31)  cannot  be  paraphrased  as  (32):  

 

(31)   La  nave  si  è  allontanata  dalla  costa  

  “The  ship  removed-­‐pron  from  the  shore    

(32)   *La  nave  ha  allontanato  se  stessa  dalla  costa  

  *“The  ship  has  removed  itself  from  the  shore  

 

 

 

 

Page 66: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  66  

4.2.1.2.  NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{di}PP  /  NP_subj#V-­‐si#{di}PP  

 

This   alternation  presents   the   same   structure  as   the  one  discussed   in  4.2.1.1.,  with   the  

only  syntactic  difference  being  the  preposition  introducing  the  PP,  which,  in  this  case,  is  

di  (“of”).  

 

(33)   a.  Ho  convinto  i  colleghi  della  validità  della  teoria  

  “I  have  convinced  the  colleagues  of  the  validity  of  the  theory”  

b.  Mi  sono  convinto  del  mio  errore  

  “I  convinced-­‐pron  of  my  mistake”  

 

From   the   analysis   of   our   sample,   it   emerged   that   this   alternation   is   allowed   by   the  

following   verbs:   convincere,   privare,   fornire,   ricoprire,   riempire,   caricare,   svuotare,  

dotare,   investire,   colmare,   incaricare,   circondare,   coprire36.   They   can   be   grouped   in   the  

following  sub-­‐classes:  

 

a.  FILL  VERBS:  ricoprire,  riempire,  caricare,  svuotare,  colmare,  circondare,  coprire;  

b.  VERBS  OF  FULFILLING:  fornire,  dotare,  investire,  incaricare37;  

c.  VERBS  OF  POSSESSIONAL  DEPRIVATION:  privare;  

d.  VERBS  OF  SOCIAL  INTERACTION:  convincere.  

 

These  verbs  are,  like  the  ones  in  4.2.1.1.,  direct  reflexive  and,  therefore,  what  we  said  in  

relation  to  the  semantic  value  of  the  pronoun  si   is  valid  also  for  the  verbs  listed  above;  

this  means  that  (33b)  can  be  reformulated  as  (34):  

 

(34)   Ho  convinto  me  stesso  del  mio  errore    

 

As  for  the  semantic  role  of  the  PP  introduced  by  di,   in  the  three  first  classes  described  

above  it  refers  to  an  entity  that  is  either  moved  (in  a.),  given  (in  b.)  or  taken  away  (in  c.).  

                                                                                                               36  To  convince,  to  deprive,  to  supply,  to  lavish,  to  fill  up,  to  load,  to  empty,  to  provide,  to  assign,  to  fill  to  the  brim,  appoint,  to  overload,  to  cover.  37  In  Levin  (1993),  to  assign  and  to  appoint  are  classified  as  a  VERB  OF  FUTURE  HAVING  and  as  an   APPOINT   VERB   respectively.   However,   given   their   meaning   in   Italian   and   their   syntactic  behaviour,  we  believe  that  they  fit  the  VERBS  OF  FULFILLING  class  better.    

Page 67: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  67  

Also,  the  NP  in  the  object  position  can  describe  either  a  physical  place,  as  in  (35),  or  an  

animate  entity,  as  in  (36)  and  (37):  

 

(35)   Coprire  le  pareti  di  quadri    

  “To  cover  the  walls  with  paintings”  

(36)   Incaricare  un  amico  della  commissione  

  “To  appoint  a  friend  to  an  errand”  

(37)   Privare  i  dipendenti  della  paga  

  “To  deprive  workers  of  the  salary”  

   

As  for  the  verb  convincere  in  d.,  the  NP  refers  always  to  a  person  or  a  group,  while  the  PP  

introduced   by   di   can   be   construed   as   a   STIMULUS,   namely   a   “cause   in  an   event   that  

elicits  an  emotional  or  psychological  response”  (VerbNet  Annotation  Guidelines,  p.  21).  

 

4.2.1.3.  NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{a}PP  /  NP_subj#V-­‐si#{a}PP  

 

This  alternation  shares  the  basic  structure  we  have  dealt  with  until  now,  but  contrary  to  

what  we  have  seen  so  far,  it  features  a  PP  introduce  by  the  preposition  a  (“to”,  “beside”,  

“with”):  

 

(38)   a.  Ha  abituato  i  figli  allo  studio  

  “She  accustomed  the  children  to  studying”  

  b.  Si  sono  abituati  a  una  nuova  vita  

  “They  have  accustomed-­‐pron  to  a  new  life”  

 

Within   our   annotated   sample,   the   following   verbs   allow   for   this   alternation:  disporre,  

affidare,   donare,  mostrare,   alternare,   opporre,   adattare,   abituare,  mescolare,   affiancare,  

costringere,   agganciare,   esporre,   consacrare,   adeguare,   accordare,   unire,   iscrivere,  

preparare,   sottrarre,   paragonare,   attaccare,   raccomandare,   presentare,   votare,  

appassionare,   associare,   allineare,   vendere,   avvicinare,   indirizzare,   dichiarare,   dare,  

predisporre,  sommare,  sottoporre,  accostare,  concedere,  rivolgere,  consegnare,  interessare,  

Page 68: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  68  

dedicare38.   What   all   these   verbs   have   in   common,   in   spite   of   their   obvious   semantic  

differences,  is  the  fact  that  they  all  describe  actions  whose  accomplishment  necessarily  

implies   either   a   final   point   to   reach,   or   a   general   entity   without   the   participation   of  

which  the  action  is  not  completed:   in  both  cases,   it   is  expressed  as  a  PP  introduced  by  

the   preposition   a.   This   implied   ending   point,   however,   can   refer   to   various   entities,  

depending  on  which  the  following  sub-­‐classes  are  possible:  

 

I.  {a}PP  =  physical  place:  affiancare,  attaccare,  iscrivere,  avvicinare,  accostare  (VERBS  OF  

MOTION);  

 

(39)   a.  Affiancheremo  il  mobile  alla  scala  

  “We  will  move  the  wardrobe  beside  the  stair”  

  b.  Ti  sei  affiancato  a  un  auto  

  “You  moved-­‐pron  beside  a  car”  

   

II.   {a}PP   =   person/group:   affidare,   donare,   promettere,   raccomandare,   presentare,  

vendere,  indirizzare,  dare,  concedere,  consegnare   (VERBS  OF  CHANGE  OF  POSSESSION),  

dichiarare,  rivolgere  (VERBS  OF  COMMUNICATION);    

 

(40)   a.  Ti  presento  a  mia  madre  

  “I  introduce  you  to  my  mother”  

  b.  Presentarsi  ai  nuovi  colleghi”  

  “To  introduce-­‐pron  to  the  new  colleagues”  

 

III.  {a}PP  =  situation  or  state  of  things:  disporre,  adattare,  abituare,  costringere,  esporre,  

consacrare,   adeguare,   preparare,   sottrarre,   allineare,   votare,   appassionare,   predisporre,  

obbligare,  sottoporre,  interessare,  dedicare  (mainly  VERBS  OF  SOCIAL  INTERACTION)  ;  

 

 

                                                                                                               38  To  prepare,  to  entrust,  to  donate,  to  show,  to  alternate,  to  oppose,  to  adjust,  to  accustom,  to  mix,  to  place   side  by   side,   to   force,   to  hook,   to   expose,   to   consecrate,   to  adapt,   to   reconcile,   to   join,   to  enrol,   to  get   ready,   to  devote,   to   thrill,   to  associate,   to  adjust,   to   sell,   to  approach,   to  address,   to  declare,  to  give,  to  predispose,  to  sum  up,  to  undergo,  to  pull  close,  to  grant,  to  address,  to  give,  to  interest,  to  dedicate.    

Page 69: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  69  

(41)   a.  Sottrassero  il  ragazzo  agli  sguardi  indiscreti  dei  presenti  

  “They  took  the  boy  away  from  the  indiscrete  gazes  of  the  people”  

  b.  Ti  sei  sottratto  a  una  responsabilità    

  “You  took  away-­‐pron  from  a  responsibility”  

 

IV.  {a}PP  =  third  necessary  entity:    opporre,  alternare,  mescolare,  agganciare,  accordare,  

paragonare,  associare,  sommare  (VERBS  OF  COMBINING  AND  ATTACHING).  

 

(42)   a.  Accordo  i  tendaggi  all’arredamento  

  “I  match  the  curtains  with  the  furniture”  

  b.  Il  colore  delle  pareti  si  accorda  a  quello  del  divano  

  “The  colour  of  the  walls  matches-­‐pron  with  that  of  the  couch”  

 

4.2.1.4.  NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{in}PP  /  NP_subj#V-­‐si#{in}PP  

 

The  peculiarity  of  this  alternation  lies   in  the  preposition  introducing  the  PP,  namely   in  

(“in,  into”):  

 

(43)   a.  Il  provvedimento  ha  integrato  i  portatori  di  handicap  nella  società      

  “The  measurement  has  integrated  disabled  people  within  society”  

b.  Mi  sono  integrato  nel  nuovo  ambiente  di  lavoro  

  “I  have  integrated-­‐pron  in  the  new  workplace”  

 

The  verbs  in  our  sample  that  allow  this  alternation  are:  proiettare,  integrare,  immergere,  

situare,  rinchiudere,  specializzare,  inserire,  inquadrare,  trasformare39.  Even  though  these  

verbs   are   semantically   heterogeneous,   in   all   of   them   the   preposition   in   refers   to   a  

situation,   a   place   or   a   physical   entity   that   can   be   construed   as   the   final   point   of   the  

action  described  by  the  verb.  We  propose  now  a  sub-­‐classification,  partly  derived  from  

Levin  (1993)  –  a.,  b.,  c.  –,  partly  proposed  here  for  the  first  time  –  d.,  e.  –:    

 

 

                                                                                                               39  To  project,  to  integrate,  to  put  effort  in,  to  immerse,  to  situate,  to  close  in,  to  specialise,  to  insert,  to  contextualise,  to  transform.    

Page 70: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  70  

a.  PUT  VERBS:  immergere,  rinchiudere,  inserire;  

b.  AMALGAMATE  VERBS:  integrare;  

c.  TURN  VERBS:  trasformare;  

d.  VERBS  OF  CONTEXTUALISATION:  situare,  inquadrare;  

e.  VERBS  OF  DEDICATION:  proiettare,  specializzare.  

 

In  a  manner  similar  to  that  discussed  in  relation  to  the  verbs  in  4.2.1.1.,  we  believe  that  a  

further  distinction  can  be  made  depending  on  the  semantic  value  of  the  pronoun  si  in  the  

pronominal  realisation,  an  aspect  that  is  strictly  related  to  the  possibility  for  these  verbs  

to  have  only  agentive  subjects  or  not:  

 

I.   DIRECT  REFLEXIVE  VERBS:   rinchiudere,   integrare.   These   verbs   can   only   have   an   animate  

agentive  subject  and,  in  the  pronominal  form,  even  though  they  are  unaccusative  verbs,  

their  semantic  valency  is  still  transitive,  with  the  pronoun  si  acting  as  the  object  of  the  

verb   and   co-­‐referring   to   the   same   entity   of   the   subject,   as   demonstrated   by   the  

possibility  to  paraphrase  (43b)  as  (44):  

 

(44)   Ho  integrato  me  stesso  nel  nuovo  ambiente  di  lavoro  

  “I  integrated  myself  in  the  new  workplace”    

 

II.   DIRECT   REFLEXIVE/INTRANSITIVE   PRONOMINAL   VERBS:   immergere,   inserire,   trasformare,  

proiettare,  specializzare.  These  verbs  allow   for  both  an  agentive   subject,   in  which  case  

the  pronoun   si   does   act   as   a   semantic   object   co-­‐referring  with   the   subject   (45),   and  a  

non-­‐agentive   subject,   therefore   becoming   intransitive   pronominal   verbs   (46),   which,  

unsurprisingly,  cannot  be  paraphrased  as  (47):  

   

(45)   Il  fidanzato  di  mia  sorella  si  è  inserito  bene  nella  compagnia  

  “My  sister’s  boyfriend  integrated-­‐pron  well  in  the  group”  

 

(46)   Il  piano  si  inserisce  nella  struttura  portante  

  “The  flat  surface  integrates-­‐pron  into  the  carrier  structure”  

(47)   *Il  piano  inserisce  se  stesso  nella  struttura  portante  

  *“The  flat  surface  integrates  itself  into  the  carrier  structure”  

Page 71: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  71  

III.   INTRANSITIVE  PRONOMINAL  VERBS:   situare,   inquadrare.   These   verbs   can   only   have   non-­‐

agentive   subjects   and,   in   the   pronominal   realisation,   the   pronoun   si   indicates   the  

inchoativity  of  the  action  described  (48)  and  it  could  never  be  paraphrased  as  (49):  

 

(48)   Il  provvedimento  si  inquadra  in  un  vasto  piano  di  interventi  

  “The  measure  places-­‐pron  within  a  broad  intervention  program”  

(49)   *Il  provvedimento  ha  inquadrato  se  stesso  in  un  vasto  piano  di  interventi    

  *”The  measure  has  placed  itself  within  a  broad  intervention  program”  

 

This  particularity   is  due   to   the   fact   that,  while   the  verbs   in   I  describe  actions   that   the  

agent   carries   out   on   themselves   or   on   one   of   their   qualities,   the   verbs   in   III   indicate  

actions  that  can  only  be  transferred  onto  external  entities,  as  the  agrammaticality  of  the  

sentence  in  (50)  shows:  

 

(50)   *Mi  sono  situato  in  un  momento  economico  sfavorevole    

  *”I  placed  myself  in  an  unfavourable  economic  time”  

 

On  the  other  hand,  as  we  have  discussed  above,  the  verbs  in  II  lay  something  in  between  

those  in  I  and  III,  allowing  for  both  types  of  subject  and,  consequently,  allowing  for  both  

interpretations  of  the  pronoun  si.  

 

4.2.1.5.  NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{su}PP  /  NP_subj#V-­‐si#{su}PP  

 

This  alternation  has  the  same  basic  structure  as  the  ones  presented  so  far,  but  with  the  

PP  introduced  by  the  preposition  su  (“on”):  

 

(51)   a.  Hanno  basato  i  calcoli  sui  dati  ufficiali  

  “They  based  the  evaluations  on  official  data”  

b.  L’accusa  si  basa  sulle  testimonianze  

  “The  prosecution  bases-­‐pron  on  the  depositions”  

 

Page 72: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  72  

Within  our  sample  of  verbs,  those  that  present  this  alternation  are:  fondare,  proiettare,  

basare,   concentrare.   Since   none   of   these   verbs   is   taken   into   consideration   in   Levin  

(1993),  we  propose  our  own  sub-­‐classification:  

 

a.  BASE  VERBS:  fondare,  basare;  

b.  VERBS  OF  FOCUS:  proiettare,  concentrare.    

 

The   interesting   fact  about   these  verbs   is   that,   even   though   it   is   still   true   that   they  are  

direct  reflexives,  in  the  pronominal  form  the  entity  indicated  by  the  pronoun  si  does  not  

coincide   with   the   one   denoted   by   the   subject,   but   rather   with   one   of   its   faculties,   as  

demonstrated   by   the   fact   that   (52)   cannot   be   paraphrased   as   (53),   but,   in   fact,   by  

something  along  the  lines  of  (54):  

 

(52)   Mi  sono  concentrato  sul  libro  

  “I  concentrated-­‐pron  on  the  book”  

(53)     ?Ho  concentrato  me  stesso  sul  libro  

  ?“I  concentrated  myself  on  the  book”  

(54)     Ho  concentrato  l’attenzione/lo  sguardo  sul  libro  

  “I  concentrated  my  attention/my  mind  on  the  book”  

 

4.2.1.6.  NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{con}PP  /  NP_subj#V-­‐si#{con}PP  

 

This  alternation  presents,  once  again,   the  same  general   structure  discussed  so   far,  but  

with  a  PP  introduced  by  the  preposition  con  (“with”):  

 

(55)   a.  I  contadini  scambiano  grano  con  petrolio    

  “Farmers  swap  wheat  with  petrol”      

  b.  Mi  sono  scambiato  con  il  compagno  di  banco  

  “I  swapped-­‐pron  with  my  deskmate”  

Page 73: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  73  

From   the   analysis   of   our   sample,   it   appears   that   this   alternation   is   allowed   by   these  

verbs:  conciliare,  combinare,  alternare,  scambiare,  confrontare,  mescolare40.  Accordingly  

to  Levin  (1993),  the  following  sub-­‐classes  are  possible:  

 

a.  AMALGAMATE  VERBS:  conciliare,  alternare,  scambiare,  confrontare;    

b.  MIX  VERBS:  combinare,  mescolare.  

 

As  the  names  of  the  classes  suggests,  all  these  verbs  describe  actions  in  which  an  entity  

is  mixed  up  or  amalgamated  with  another  one.  Moreover,  the  striking  inherent  semantic  

coherency   of   these   verbs   is   confirmed  by   the   fact   that,   in   Italian,   the   preposition   that  

indicates   the   conjunction   of   two   or  more   elements   is   precisely   the   one   found   in   both  

realisations,  namely  con  (see  Serianni  1989,  VIII.89-­‐91).    

  With   regard   to   the  pronominal   form,  all   these  verbs  allow   for  both  an  agentive  

and  a  non-­‐agentive   subject,   the   selection  of  which   is   responsible   for   a  direct   reflexive  

interpretation   (56)   or   an   intransitive   pronominal   one   (58),   strictly   followed   by   the  

possibility  or  not  of  a  paraphrase,  as  demonstrated  in  (57)  and  (59)  respectively:    

 

(56)   A  lavoro,  mi  alterno  con  la  mia  amica      

  “At  work,  I  alternate-­‐pron  with  my  friend”  

(57)   A  lavoro,  alterno  me  stessa  con  la  mia  amica  

  At  work,  I  alternate  myself  with  my  friend  

 

(58)   In  un  musical,  i  dialoghi  si  alternano  con  le  canzoni  

  “In  a  musical,  dialogues  alternate-­‐pron  with  songs”    

 (59)   *In  un  musical,  I  dialoghi  alternano  se  stessi  con  le  canzoni  

  *”In  a  musical,  dialogues  alternate  themselves  with  songs”  

 

4.2.1.7.  NP_subj#V#NP_obj  /  NP_subj#V-­‐si  

 

The   alternation   we   discuss   now   is   by   far   the   most   common   one   within   our   sample,  

including   approximately   20%   of   the   verbs:   given   this   substantial   inventory   and   for  

reasons  of  space,  we  thought  it  best  to  list  all  the  verbs  only  in  the  appendix,  discussing                                                                                                                  40  To  reconcile,  to  cover  again,  to  alternate,  to  swap,  to  confront,  to  mix.    

Page 74: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  74  

here   only   their   syntactic   and   semantic   properties.   Moreover,   we   chose   to   attempt   a  

classification  not  based  on  Levin’s  classes,  but  on  the  particular  semantic  value  that  the  

pronominal   form   carries:   this   allowed   us   to   focus   on   the  most   salient   features   of   the  

verbs  and  the  different  entailments  that  the  alternation  has.  Therefore,  the  classification  

we   propose   does   not   claim   to   be   either   thorough   or   the   only   one   possible:   on   the  

contrary,   we   believe   that   a   deeper   semantic   classification   of   these   verbs,   preferably  

based  on  a  larger  sample,  is  indeed  needed  and  desirable.      

We  will   present  here   the  different   sub-­‐classes  we   found,  with   the   indication  of  

the   most   representative   verbs   for   each   class,   which,   however,   we   fully   list   in   the  

Appendix:  

 

I.  DIRECT  REFLEXIVES:   isolare,  lavare,  rinnovare,  liberare,  negare,  allontanare,  scoprire,  

schierare,   esprimere,   giustificare,   assicurare,   uccidere,   ammazzare,   allenare,   licenziare,  

accettare,   consolare,   contraddire,   tormentare,   interrogare,   valorizzare,   ferire,   escludere,  

spiegare,  umiliare,  nascondere41.  The  semantic  peculiarity  of  these  verbs  is  the  fact  that,  

in  the  pronominal  form,  subject  and  object  co-­‐refer  to  the  same  entity,  as  illustrated  by  

the  semantic  equivalence  of  (60a)  and  (60b)  (Serianni,  XI.  18):  

 

(60)   a.  Spesso  si  giustifica    

  “Often  he  justifies-­‐pron     b.  Spesso  giustifica  se  stesso      

  “Often  he  justifies  himself”  

 

From   a   syntactic   perspective,   however,   they   are   intransitive   verbs   that,   in   fact   could  

never  take  a  direct  object,  as  shown  in  (61a),  but,  if  necessary,  could  be  accompanied  by  

an  indirect  object  (61b):  

   

(61)   a.  *Vi  contraddite  voi  

  *“You  contradict  yourself    you”  

  b.  Vi  contraddite  (con  le  vostre  azioni)  

  “You  contradict-­‐pron  (with  your  actions)”                                                                                                                  41  To  isolate,  to  wash,  to  renovate,  to  liberate,  to  deny,  to  push,  to  discover,  to  deploy,  to  express,  to  justify,   to   assure,   to   kill,   to   murder,   to   train,   to   fire,   to   accept,   to   consulate,   to   contradict,   to  torment,  to  interrogate,  to  value,  to  injure,  to  exclude,  to  explain,  to  humiliate,  to  hide.      

Page 75: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  75  

II.  RECIPROCAL  REFLEXIVES:  conoscere,  sospettare,  rispettare,  combattere,  fronteggiare,  

controllare,   attirare,   ritrovare,   rivedere,   stimare,   sfidare,   abbracciare,   rincorrere,  

inseguire,   sfiorare,   scegliere,   dividere,   stringere,   picchiare,   disturbare,   odiare,   respingere,  

frequentare,   temere,   incontrare,   sposare,   vedere,   trovare,   baciare,   soccorrere42.   What  

makes  these  verbs  interesting  is  the  fact  that  they  “express  an  action  that  two  or  more  

subjects  carry  out  and  undergo  at  once”  (Battista  Moretti  &  Orvieto  1983,  vol.  III,  p.  83).  

This   semantic   property   shows   its   influence   on   the   syntactic   construction   allowed   by  

these   verbs   in   that   they   can   only   have   a   plural   subject   (62)   and   would   not   be  

grammatically  acceptable  with  a  singular  one  (63):  

 

(62)   Ci  siamo  incontrati  tanto  tempo  fa  

  “We  met-­‐pron  a  long  time  ago”  

(63)   *Luca  si  è  incontrato  ieri  

  *”Luca  met  himself  yesterday”  

 

I.   CAUSATIVE-­‐INCHOATIVE   ALTERNATION:   chiudere,   spaventare,   confondere,  

emozionare,   abbassare,   restringere,   staccare,   ridurre,   intrecciare,   sbloccare,   scatenare,  

rovinare,   turbare,  piegare,  conservare,   spezzare,   spaccare,  rompere43.   These   verbs   allow  

the  argument  alternation  extensively  examined  in  2.1.,  namely  the  causative-­‐inchoative  

alternation.  As  we  discussed  in  the  second  chapter,  this  alternation  consists  of  a  pair  of  

sentences   whose   verb   expresses   the   same   situation,   generally   a   change   of   state,   but  

starting   from  different   semantic  perspectives,  which   are   reflected   in   the   two  different  

realisations.  In  the  causative  one,  the  verb  meaning  includes  an  agentive  participant  who  

causes  the  situation  (64),  whereas  in  the  inchoative  variant  the  verb  meaning  excludes  

such  agent  and  presents  the  situation  as  occurring  spontaneously  (65):  

 

(64)   Lucia  ha  spezzato  un  biscotto  

  “Lucia  broke  a  biscuit”  

                                                                                                                 42  To  know,  to  suspect,  to  respect,  to  fight,  to  face,  to  control,  to  attract,  to  rediscover,  to  see  again,  to  esteem,  to  challenge,  to  hug,  to  chase,  to  run  after,  to  brush  against,  to  choose,  to  split,  to  cling,  to  beat  up,  to  disturb,  to  hate,  to  repel,  to  hang  out,  to  fear,  to  meet,  to  marry,  to  see,  to  come  across,  to  kiss,  to  help.  43  To  close,  to  frighten,  to  confuse,  to  move,  to  lower,  to  shrink,  to  remove,  to  reduce,  to  intertwine,  to  unblock,  to  instigate,  to  ruin,  to  upset,  to  bend,  to  keep,  to  crack,  to  smash,  to  break.        

Page 76: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  76  

(65)   La  corda  si  è  spezzata  

  “The  rope  has  broken-­‐pron”  

 

The   verbs   in   our   sample   that   allow   this   alternation   are   mainly   CHANGE   OF   STATE  

VERBS   (Levin   1993),   such   as   spezzare,   rovinare,  piegare  and   rompere.   However,   there  

are  numerous  PSYCH-­‐VERBS  (Levin  1993),  such  as  spaventare,  emozionare  and  turbare:  

even   in   this   case,   the   inchoative   realisation   does   not   feature   an   agentive   participant  

responsible   for   prompting   the   action,   which   is   still   presented   as   a   spontaneous  

happening  (66):  

 

(66)   Non  mi  emoziono  facilmente  

  “I  am  not  moved-­‐pron  easily”  

 

4.2.1.8.  NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{...}PP  /  NP_subj#V-­‐si#{...}PP  

 

This   alternation   is,   to   a   certain   extent,   syntactically   similar   to   the   one   discussed   in  

4.2.1.7,   but   with   some   notable   semantic   differences.   The   first   thing   to   notice   is   that,  

contrary   to   the  previous  alternation,   the  argument  structure  of   this  one   is  made  more  

complex  by   the   introduction  of  a  PP;  moreover,   this  PP   is  not   introduced  by  a  definite  

preposition,   but,   depending   on   the   verb  meaning   and   on   the   noun   filler   of   the   slot   in  

question,  it  can  be  preceded,  in  both  realisations,  by  different  prepositions,  as  shown  in  

(67):  

 

(67)   a.  Marco  ha  buttato  il  riso  agli  sposi  /  la  maglia  in  lavatrice  /  acqua  sul  fuoco  

“Marco  threw  rice  at  the  newlyweds  /  the  jumper  in  the  washing  machine  /  water  

on  the  fire”  

  b.  Marco  si  è  buttato  in  acqua  /  sul  letto  /  contro  qualcuno  

  “Marco  threw-­‐pron  in  the  water  /  on  the  bed  /  against  someone”  

 

The   verb   in   our   sample   that   allow   for   this   alternation   are:   infilare,   girare,   disporre,  

informare,   calare,   orientare,   buttare,   muovere,   trascinare,   collocare,   gettare,   voltare,  

fissare,   versare,   rilanciare,   avviare,   aggiungere,   aprire,   spingere,   insinuare,   accordare,  

avvolgere,  stabilire,  spostare,  rovesciare,  lanciare,  imprimere,  spargere,  dirigere,  piazzare,  

Page 77: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  77  

sistemare,   ambientare,   stampare,   stendere,  mettere,   rivolgere,   abbandonare,   porre44.   As  

for  the  verbs  in  4.1.7.,  we  propose  a  classification  of  these  verbs  based  on  the  particular  

semantic  value  that  the  pronominal  form  carries:  

 

I.   DIRECT   REFLEXIVES:   girare,   disporre,   calare,   orientare,   buttare,  muovere,   trascinare,  

gettare,   voltare,   rilanciare,   avviare,   spingere,   stabilire,   spostare,   lanciare,   dirigere,  

piazzare,  sistemare,  ambientare,  stendere,  mettere,  rivolgere,  abbandonare,  porre  (VERBS  

OF   MOTION),   informare,   accordare45  (VERBS   OF   COMMUNICATION).     When   all   these  

verbs   take   the   pronominal   form,   the   pronoun   si   does   act   as   a   semantic   object,   co-­‐

referring  with  the  subject  itself,  as  illustrated  by  the  possible  reformulation  of  (68b)  as  

(69):  

   

(68)   a.  I  fondatori  hanno  stabilito  la  sede  dell’azienda  a  Roma  /  nella  capitale  

“The  founders  have  established  the  headquarters  of  the  business  in  Rome  /  in  the  

capital”  

  b.  Ho  deciso  di  stabilirmi  a  Milano  

  “I  have  decided  to  establish-­‐pron  in  Milan”  

(69)   Ho  deciso  di  stabilire  me  stesso  a  Milano46    

  “I  have  decided  to  establish-­‐pron  myself  in  Milan”  

 

II.   CAUSATIVE-­‐INCOHATIVE   ALTERNATION:   infilare,   collocare,   versare,   aggiungere,  

aprire,  insinuare,  avvolgere,  rovesciare,  spargere,  imprimere,  stampare.  As  seen  in  4.2.1.7.,  

these  verbs  allow  for  two  different  realisations  whose  meaning  varies  substantially:  the  

first  one  (70a)  is  a  causative  sentence  in  which  the  subject  refers  to  either  an  agent  or  a  

cause  responsible  for  the  instantiation  of  the  action;  in  the  second  one  (70b),  the  subject  

corresponds  to  a  semantic  object  that  undergoes  the  action  described  by  the  verb,  which  

is  presented  as  random  and  in  no  way  attributable  to  an  agentive  participant:  

                                                                                                               44  To  pierce  through,  to  turn,  to  put  in  order,  to  inform,  to  lower,  to  orientate,  to  throw,  to  move,  to  carry,   to  place,   to  toss,   to  turn,   to  cast  again,   to  address,   to  add,  to  open,  to  push,   to   insinuate/to  creep   in,   to   agree,   to  wind   up,   to   establish,   to   transfer,   to   spill,   to   cast   to   impress,   to   spread,   to  direct,  to  position,  to  set,  to  locate,  to  print,  to  spread  out,  to  put,  to  turn  again,  to  abandon,  to  put.    45  These   two  verbs  of   communication  are  quite  problematic   since   the  pronominal   form  allows  for  an  interpretation  in  between  the  typical  direct  reflexive  one  and  the  intensive  reflexive  one,  without  clearly  falling  into  either  of  them.  46  This  sentence  is  perfectly  formed  in  Italian,  but  it  could  be  used  only  in  a  marked  context,  such  as  that  allowed  by  topicalisation  mechanisms.        

Page 78: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  78  

(70)   a.  Ho  rovesciato  la  minestra  sul  tappeto  

  “I  spilt  the  soup  on  the  carpet”    

  b.  Il  latte  si  è  rovesciato  per  terra  

  “The  milk  spilt-­‐pron  onto  the  floor”  

 

As   for   the   PP,   it   refers   to   either   the   ending   point   of   the   action,   as   shown   in   (70),   or  

simply  a  physical  entity  on  which  the  action  is  imposed,  as  in  (71):  

 

(71)   a.  Ha  impresso  le  proprie  orme  sulla  sabbia  

    “She  impressed  her  footsteps  on  the  sand”  

b.  Le  orme  si  imprimono  sulla  sabbia  

  “Footsteps  impress-­‐pron  onto  the  sand”  

 

III.   INTENSIVE   REFLEXIVES:   fissare.   This   class   consists   of   only   one   verb,   but   it   is  

representative  of  a  type  of  verbs  that  allow  a  pronominal  form,  in  which,  however,  the  

pronoun  does  not  act  a  semantic  object  co-­‐referring  to  the  subject,  but  rather  with  one  

of  the  subject’s  qualities  (72):  

   

(72)   Fissa  sempre  lo  sguardo  sulla  mia  ragazza  

  “He  always  fixes  his  gaze  on  my  girlfriend”  

 

This  fact  is  also  confirmed  by  the  impossibility  of  a  sentence  like  (73)  to  be  paraphrased  

as   (74),   since   the   pronoun   in   the   former   sentence   simply   indicates   a   greater  

involvement  of  the  subject,  and  not  the  subject  itself:  

 

(73)   Si  è  fissato  con  quella  ragazza  /  in  un  progetto  

  “He  fixed-­‐pron  with  that  girl  /  in  a  project”  

 (74)   *Ha  fissato  se  stesso  con  quella  ragazza  /  in  un  progetto  

  *“He  fixed  himself  with  that  girl  /  in  a  project”  

 

 

 

Page 79: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  79  

4.2.2.  Alternations  involving  two  intransitive  variants  

 

The   alternation  we  discuss   in   this   section  differs   from   the  ones  presented   so   far  with  

respect  to  transitivity:  in  the  case  examined  below,  in  fact,  verbs  are  always  intransitive  

in  both  the  realisations  allowed.    

 

4.2.2.1.  NP_subj#V  /  NP_subj#V#{...}PP  

 

This  alternation  involves  a  change  in  the  number  of  arguments  required  by  the  verb  and,  

as  we  will  see,  it  is  connected  to  a  more  specified  use  of  the  verb:  

 

(75)   a.  Nel  dopoguerra,  molti  furono  costretti  ad  emigrare  

  “During  the  post-­‐war  period  many  people  were  forced  to  emigrate”  

  b.  I  miei  nonni  emigrarono  in  Germania  

  “My  grandparents  emigrated  to  Germany”  

 

The   verbs   within   our   sample   that   allow   this   alternation   are:   tornare,   girare,   correre,  

giocare,   finire,   accorrere,   uscire,   battere,   emigrare,   terminare,   perdere,   bastare,  

combattere,  risalire,  arrivare,  durare,  oscillare,  riuscire,  volare,  nascere,  giungere,  ricadere,  

cadere,  scivolare,  avanzare,  votare,  venire,  crescere,  piombare,  sorgere,  comparire,  reagire,  

saltare,   slittare,   lavorare,   picchiare,   salire,   vagare,   precipitare,   rientrare47.   They   can   be  

grouped  into  the  following  sub-­‐classes  (Levin  1993),  the  last  three  of  which  (p.,  q.,  r.)  we  

propose  here  for  the  first  time:    

 

a.   VERBS   OF   INHERENTLY   DIRECTED   MOTION:   tornare,   uscire,   risalire,   arrivare,  

giungere,  ricadere,  cadere,  avanzare,  venire,  piombare,  salire,  precipitare,  rientrare;  

b.  ROLL  VERBS:  girare,  oscillare,  scivolare,  slittare;  

c.  RUN  VERBS:  correre,  accorrere,  volare,  saltare;  

d.  LEAVE  VERBS:  emigrare;  

e.  PERFORMANCE  VERBS:  giocare;    

                                                                                                               47  To  come  back,   to  spin,   to  run,   to  play,   to  end,   to  hasten,   to  exit,   to  hit,   to  emigrate,   to   finish,   to  loose,  to  be  enough,  to  fight,  to  go  back  up,  to  arrive,  to  last,  to  swing,  to  succeed,  to  fly,  to  be  born,  to  reach,  to  fall  again,  to  fall,  to  slide,  to  advance,  to  vote,  to  come,  to  grow,  to  precipitate,  to  rise,  to  appear,  to  react,  to  jump,  to  slid,  to  work,  to  beat,  to  go  up,  to  wander,  to  plunge,  to  come  back  in.  

Page 80: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  80  

f.  BEGIN  VERBS:  finire,  terminare;    

g.  HIT  VERBS:  battere,  picchiare;  

h.  APPEAR  VERBS:  nascere,  sorgere,  comparire;  

i.  VERBS  OF  CALIBRATABLE  CHANGE  OF  STATE:  crescere;  

j.  MEANDER  VERBS:  vagare;  

k..  OTHER  ALTERNATING  VERBS  OF  CHANGE  OF  STATE:  perdere;  

l.  KNEAD  VERBS:  lavorare;  

m.  MEET  VERBS:  combattere;  

n.  MARVEL  VERBS:  reagire;  

o.  VERBS  OF  FULFILLING:  votare;  

p.  NEED  VERBS:  bastare;  

q.  VERBS  OF  DURATION:  durare;  

r.  VERBS  OF  SUCCESS:  riuscire.  

 

Even   though   this   group   includes   semantically   heterogeneous   verbs,   they   are   all   verbs  

whose  meaning  can  be  further  specified  through  the  addition  of  a  PP,  the  preposition  of  

which  is  greatly  determined  by  the  specifying  complement  selected  by  each  verb,  as  the  

few  examples  in  (76)  and  (77)  demonstrate:  

 

(76)   Sta  venendo  una  macchina  

  A  car  is  coming  

La  trottola  non  gira  più  

The  spinning  top  does  not  spin  anymore  

  Ai  bambini  piace  saltare  

  Kids  like  to  jump  

  Possiamo  andare  a  giocare?  

“Can  we  go  to  play?”  

  La  partita  è  terminata  

  “The  match  has  ended”  

Il  sole  è  sorto  

“The  sun  has  risen”  

  La  ditta  sta  perdendo  

  “The  business  is  loosing”  

Page 81: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  81  

  L’esercito  combatte  valorosamente  

“The  army  is  fighting  bravely”  

  I  soldi  non  bastano  mai  

  “Money  is  never  enough”  

  Sono  tessuti  che  durano  

  “These  are  fabrics  that  last”  

  L’impresa  è  riuscita  

  “The  endeavour  succeeded”  

 

(77)   Vieni  subito  da  me           [DIRECTION]  

  “Come  here  to  me”    

La  Terra  gira  intorno  al  Sole         [DIRECTION]  

      “The  Earth  spins  around  the  Sun”  

Saltare  come  un  cerbiatto         [MANNER]  

  “To  jump  like  a  fawn”  

Il  gatto  gioca  con  il  gomitolo         [INSTRUMENT]  

  “The  cat  is  playing  with  the  ball  of  wool”  

Il  sentiero  termina  nel  bosco       [PLACE]  

“The  path  ends  in  the  wood”  

  La  città  sorge  su  una  rupe         [PLACE]  

“The  city  rises  on  a  cliff”  

  Perdere  di  autorità             [QUALITY]  

  “To  loose  in  authority”  

  Combattere  per  la  liberta         [PURPOSE]  

“To  fight  for  freedom”    

  Ti  basta  un  foglio?           [BENEFICIARY]  

  “Is  one  paper  sheet  enough  for  you?”  

  Il  bel  tempo  è  durato  per  una  settimana       [TIME]  

  “The  good  weather  lasted  for  a  week”  

Riuscire  nell’esame           [ACTIVITY]  

  “To  succeed  in  the  exam”  

 

Page 82: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  82  

This   alternation   can   be   interpreted   as   an   instantiation   of   the   phenomenon   known   as  

“argument  drop”  or  “null  arguments”  (Cole  1987;  Huang  1995),  according  to  which  core  

arguments   of   a   given   verb   can   be   syntactically   unexpressed   under   particular  

circumstances.   The  most   widely   known   type   of   “argument   drop”   is   the   “object   drop”  

(Keller  &  Lapata  1998),  whereas,   in  this  case,  we  have  a  case  of  “indirect  object  drop”,  

clearly   related   to   the   possibility   shown   by   these   verbs   to   feature   in   a   more   general  

context  or,  on  the  contrary,  in  a  more  specified  one.  

 

4.2.3.  Alternations  involving  verbs  with  predicative  complements  

 

A  predicative  complement  usually  “consists  of  a  noun  or  adjective  that,  referred  to  the  

subject  or  the  direct  object,  is  used  to  determine  and  complete  the  meaning  of  the  verb”  

(Serianni  1989,  p.  95).  Given  its  peculiar  nature,  we  thought   it  best  to  keep  it  separate  

from  the  other  alternations  examined  in  the  two  previous  sections.    

 

4.2.3.1  NP_subj#V#Cpred  /  NP_subj#V#Cpred#{a}PP  

 

This  alternation  implies  a  change  of  valence  in  the  verbs  that  allow  it,  with  the  addition  

of   a   PP   introduced   by   the   preposition  a   (“to”)   in   one   of   the   two   possible   realisations  

(78b):  

 

(78)   a.  Tutti  gli  sforzi  sono  apparsi  vani  

  “All  the  efforts  seemed  vain”  

b.  L’esito  dell’incontro  apparve  scontato  a  tutti  i  presenti  

  “The  outcome  of  the  meeting  seemed  predicted  to  all  the  present  people”  

 

The   verbs   in   our   sample   that   allow   this   alternation   are:   riuscire,   apparire,   risultare48.  

They  all  belong  to  the  class  of  copulative  verbs,  which  are  verbs  that,  similarly  to  verb  to  

be,   have   a   generic   semantic   content   and   therefore   need   to   be   further   specified   by   a  

predicative  complement.    

  The  realisation  in  (78b)  differs  from  the  one  in  (78a)  for  the  presence  of  a  PP  that  

simply  indicates  the  EXPERIENCER  (see  VerbNet  Annotation  Guidelines,  p.  21),  namely                                                                                                                  48  To  come  across  as,  to  seem,  to  turn  out  to  be.  

Page 83: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  83  

the  person  or  group  aware  of  the  action  described  by  the  combination  of  the  copulative  

verb  and  the  predicative  complement.    

 4.3.  Alternations  involving  an  argumental  sentence  and  a  phrase  complement  (NP  

or  PP)  

 

The  third  type  of  alternations  we  found  can  be  considered  to  be  somewhere  between  the  

two  presented  so  far:  in  all  the  cases  discussed  below  in  fact,  verbs  allow  for  alternations  

in  which  one   realisation   involves  either  a  noun  phrase   (NP)  or  a  prepositional  phrase  

(PP),  replaced  in  the  other  case  by  an  argumental  sentence.    

Some  of   them  entail   a   change   in   the   syntactic  valency  of   the  verbs,  while   some  

others  don’t.  Moreover,  we  classified  them  depending  on  the  syntactic  position  affected  

by   the   alternation,   namely   the   complement   position   or   the   subject   one;   however,   we  

have  decided  to  keep  separate  those  alternations  that  involve  predicative  complements,  

since,  as  we  will  see  more  in  detail,  they  can  be  considered  a  unique  class  on  their  own.    

 

4.3.1.  Alternations  affecting  a  complement  position  

 

All   the   alternations   examined   in   this   section   concern   the   complement   position,  which  

can   be   a   direct   complement   (NP_obj)   or   an   indirect   complement   (PP).   We   will   first  

discuss   those  alternations   that  do  not   involve  a   change   in   the   syntactic  valency  of   the  

verb,  followed  by  those  that  do  so.    

 

4.3.1.1.  NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{a}PP/NP_subj#V#{di}inf#{a}PP  

 

This   alternation   is   allowed   by   trivalent   verbs   and   it   involves   the   direct   complement,  

namely   the   object:   in   the   first   realisation   (79a),   this   slot   is   occupied   by   a   noun   filler  

(NP_obj),  whereas   in   the   second  one   (79b)   there   is  an  argument  clause   introduced  by  

the  complementiser  di  and  with  the  verb   in  the   infinitive   form.  On  the  other  hand,   the  

indirect  complement   introduced  by   the  preposition  a   (“to”)  and   indicating  a  somehow  

affected  participant  remains  unchanged  in  both  options:  

 

 

Page 84: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  84  

(79)   a.    Ordinò  una  marcia  forzata  ai  soldati    

  “He  ordered  a  forced  march  to  the  soldiers”  

  b.  Ordinò  agli  studenti  di  preparare  il  testo  entro  una  settimana  

  “She  ordered  to  prepare  the  text  within  a  week  to  the  students”  

 

The   verbs   in   our   sample   that   allowed   for   this   alternation   are:   rimproverare,   imporre,  

risparmiare,   garantire,   ricordare,   giurare,   promettere,   gridare,   proporre,   ordinare,  

confidare,   proibire,   annunciare,   raccontare,   chiedere,   augurare,   comandare,   offrire,  

raccomandare,   sussurrare,   dire,   predicare,   vietare,   dichiarare,   permettere,   suggerire,  

denunciare,   scrivere,   assicurare,   confessare,   concedere,   comunicare,   consigliare,   riferire,  

impedire49.  Following  Levin’s  verb  classes  (Levin  1993),  these  verbs  could  be  divided  in  

two  broad  classes:  

 

a.   VERBS   OF   COMMUNICATION:   rimproverare,   ricordare,   giurare,   promettere,   gridare,  

proporre,   confidare,   annunciare,   raccontare,   chiedere,   augurare,   raccomandare,  

sussurrare,   dire,   predicare,   dichiarare,   suggerire,   denunciare,   scrivere,   assicurare,  

confessare,  comunicare,  consigliare,  riferire;  

b.  VERBS  OF  SOCIAL   INTERACTION:   imporre,  risparmiare,  garantire,  ordinare,  proibire,  

comandare,  offrire,  vietare,  permettere,  concedere,  impedire.  

 

The   most   interesting   thing   about   this   alternation   is   that   it   overlaps   with   the   one  

discussed  in  4.1.1.1.:  the  majority  of  the  verbs  that  allow  for  it,  in  fact,  display  a  threefold  

way   of   expressing   the   direct   complement,   which   can   be   realised   as   a   noun,   as   an  

infinitive   argumental   sentence   introduced   by   di   and   as   an   argumental   sentence  

introduced  by  che  and  with  the  verb  in  a  finite  form.  Taking  the  same  verb  we  used  in  

the  examples  in  4.1.1.1.,  the  three  following  possibilities  are  therefore  given:    

 

(80)   a.  Augurai  buone  vacanze  al  mio  amico  

  “I  wished  happy  holiday  to  my  friend”  

 

                                                                                                               49  To  scold,  to  impose,  to  spare,  to  guarantee,  to  remind,  to  swear,  to  promise,  to  scream,  to  propose,  to   order,   to   confide,   to   forbid,   to   announce,   to   tell,   to   ask,   to   wish,   to   command,   to   offer,   to  recommend,  to  whisper,  to  say,  to  preach,  to  prohibit,  to  declare,  to  allow,  to  suggest,  to  denounce,  to  write,  to  assure,  to  confess,  to  grant,  to  communicate,  to  advise,  to  report,  to  impede.  

Page 85: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  85  

b.  Ti  auguro  di  fare  un  buon  viaggio  

  “I  wish  (to)  you  to  have  a  pleasant  journey”    

c.  Ti  Auguro  che  tutto  vada  bene    

  “I  wish  (to)  you  that  everything  go  well”  

 

As   a   confirmation   of   the   validity   of   our   findings,   we   also   found   the   other   possible  

alternation,   namely   the   one   between   (80a)   and   (80c),   which   we   will   discuss   in   the  

following  paragraph.    

 

4.3.1.2.  NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{a}PP/NP_subj#V#{che}fin#{a}PP  

 

This   alternation   complements   the   one   examined   in   the   previous   paragraph   in   that   it  

presents,   on   the   one   hand,   a   realisation  with   a   noun   filler   (81a)   and,   on   the   other,   a  

realisation  with  an  argumental  sentence,  introduced  in  this  case  by  the  complementiser  

che   (“that”)   and   with   the   verb   at   a   finite   form   (81b).   Furthermore,   even   in   this  

alternation,  the  indirect  complement  does  not  present  any  variation:  

 

(81)   a.  Promisero  aiuto  a  un  compagno  

  “They  promised  help  to  a  friend”  

  b.  Ti  prometto  che  arriverò  in  orario  

  “I  promise  (to)  you  that  I  will  arrive  on  time”  

 

The   verbs   that,   within   our   annotated   sample,   allowed   this   alternation   are:   augurare,  

mostrare,   garantire,   ricordare,   assicurare,   promettere,   gridare,   confidare,   ripetere,  

annunciare,   raccontare,   chiedere,   comandare,   raccomandare,   dire,   dichiarare,   segnalare,  

spiegare,   permettere,   denunciare,   proporre,   scrivere,   giurare,   confessare,   concedere,  

insegnare,   comunicare,   riferire50.   As   with   the   previous   alternation,   the   following   sub-­‐

classification  is  possible:  

 

                                                                                                               50  To  wish,  to  show,  to  guarantee,  to  remind,  to  assure,  to  promise,  to  scream,  to  confide,  to  repeat,  to  announce,  to  tell,  to  ask,  to  command,  to  recommend,  to  say,  to  declare,  to  signal,  to  explain,  to  allow,  to  denounce,  to  propose,  to  write,  to  swear,  to  confess,  to  grant,  to  teach,  to  communicate,  to  report.      

Page 86: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  86  

a.   VERBS   OF   COMMUNICATION:   augurare,   ricordare,   assicurare,   promettere,   gridare,  

confidare,   ripetere,   annunciare,   raccontare,   chiedere,   raccomandare,   dire,   dichiarare,  

segnalare,   spiegare,   denunciare,   proporre,   scrivere,   giurare,   confessare,   comunicare,  

riferire;  

b.   VERBS   OF   SOCIAL   INTERACTIONS:   mostrare,   garantire,   comandare,   permettere,  

concedere,  insegnare.  

 

As  we  briefly  mentioned  above,  the  alternation  presented  here  and  the  one  presented  in  

4.3.1.1.   are   indeed   interchangeable   for   the   majority   of   the   verbs   listed   in   these   two  

sections,   but   not   for   all   of   them.   In   fact,   there   are   five   verbs   (mostrare,   ripetere,  

segnalare,  spiegare,   insegnare)   that   appear   in   this   alternation,  but   that  do  not   seem   to  

allow  the  one  presented  in  4.3.1.1..  At  the  same  time,  there  are  twelve  verbs  that  present  

the   reverse   situation   (rimproverare,   imporre,   risparmiare,   ordinare,   proibire,   offrire,  

sussurrare,   predicare,   vietare,   suggerire,   consigliare,   impedire).   In   order   to   fully  

understand  such  fine-­‐graded  distinctions,  a  larger  sample  of  verbs  is  certainly  necessary  

and  it  was  thought  best  to  not  hazard  hasty  interpretations  that  could  easily  be  proven  

wrong.   Also,   a   cross-­‐linguistic   investigation   could   cast   some   more   light   on   the  

alternation   we   have   just   illustrated,   providing   data   from   various   languages   and,  

therefore,  allowing  for  more  plausible  claims.  

 

4.3.1.3.  NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{a}PP  /  NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{a}inf  

 

The  alternation  presented  here  involves  the  indirect  complement,  which,  even  though  it  

is  always  introduced  by  the  preposition  a  (“to”)  can  be  expressed  as  a  noun  (PP)  or  as  an  

argumental  sentence  with  the  verb  in  the  infinitive  form,  as  illustrated  in  (82):  

 

(82)   a.  Educammo  i  giovani  al  rispetto  degli  altri  

  “We  educated  young  people  to  the  respect  for  others”  

  b.  Educate  vostro  figlio  a  essere  tollerante!  

  “(You)  educate  your  son  to  be  tolerant!”  

 

The  verbs   in  our   sample   that   allow   this   alternation  are:  disporre,  autorizzare,   invitare,  

stimolare,   abituare,   indurre,  motivare,   incoraggiare,   costringere,   condannare,   esercitare,  

Page 87: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  87  

educare,   ammettere,   trattenere,   spedire,   sollecitare,   delegare,   forzare,   ridurre,   obbligare,  

mettere,  destinare51.  The  following  semantic  classes  can  be  identified:  

 

a.   PSYCH-­‐VERBS:   stimolare,   abituare,   indurre,   motivare,   incoraggiare,   esercitare,  

sollecitare,  ridurre,  obbligare;  

b.   VERBS   OF   SOCIAL   INTERACTION:   disporre,   autorizzare,   invitare,   costringere,  

condannare,  educare,  ammettere,  trattenere,  spedire,  delegare,  forzare,  mettere,  destinare.  

 

One  thing  to  notice  about  these  verbs  is  that,  in  spite  of  their  different  meanings,  they  all  

entail  a  second  animate  participant  expressed  as  the  direct  object  that  is  affected  by  the  

action  described  the  verb,  whose  meaning  is  further  specified  by  the  indirect  object.  

 

4.3.1.4.  NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{che}fin  /  NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{di}PP  

 

As  for  the  previous  alternation,  even  in  this  case  the  complement  involved  is  the  indirect  

object,  which  can  be  realised  either  as  a  noun  introduced  by  the  preposition  di  (83a),  or  

as  an  argumental  sentence  introduced  by  the  complementiser  che  (“that”)  and  with  the  

verb  in  a  finite  form  (83b):  

   

(83)   a.  Avviserà  i  parenti  della  partenza  

  “She  will  warn  the  relatives  about  the  departure”  

  b.  Ho  avvisato  tutti  che  la  lezione  è  sospesa  

  “I  have  warned  everybody  that  the  lesson  is  cancelled”  

                                                                                                                                                       

There   are   only   two   verbs   in   our   sample   that   allow   for   this   alternation:   avvisare   and  

convincere 52 .   Both   verbs   can   be   ascribed   to   the   broad   class   of   VERBS   OF  

COMMUNICATION,  even  though,  contrary  to  the  majority  of  the  verbs  in  this  class,  they  

both   entail   a   communication   aimed   at   obtaining   a   reaction   from   the   interlocutor,   an  

aspect   that   makes   these   two   verbs   less   prototypical   than   the   other   verbs   of  

communication.    

                                                                                                               51  To  prepare,  to  authorise,  to  invite,  to  stimulate,  to  accustom,  to  induce,  to  motivate,  encourage,  to  compel,   to   condemn,   to   accustom,   to   educate,   to   admit,   to   hold,   to   send,   to   urge,   to   delegate,   to  force,  to  reduce,  to  obligate,  to  place,  to  destine.    52  To  warn,  to  convince.    

Page 88: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  88  

4.3.1.5.  NP_subj#V#{a}PP  /  NP_subj#V#{a}inf  

 

This   alternation   is   allowed   by   intransitive   verbs   and   it   involves   the   indirect   object,  

which   is   always   introduced  by   the  preposition  a   (“to”),   but   can  be   realized   as   a   noun  

(84a)  or  as  an  argumental  sentence  (84b):  

 

(84)   a.  Rinunciai  a  un  progetto  

  “I  gave  up  on  a  project”  

  b.  Rinunciò  a  partire  

  “She  gave  up  on  going  away”  

 

Within  our  annotated  sample,   the  verbs  that  allow  for  this  alternation  are:  contribuire,  

arrivare,   rinunciare,   scappare,   pervenire,   provvedere,   giocare,   venire,   badare,   pensare,  

tenere,  ritornare,  mirare,  aspirare,  concorrere,   tendere53.   These   verbs   can  be  divided   in  

the  following  broad  semantic  classes:  

 

a.  VERBS  OF  MOTION:  arrivare,  scappare,  pervenire,  giocare,  venire,  ritornare;  

b.   VERBS   OF   PERSONAL   INVOLVEMENT:   contribuire,   rinunciare,   provvedere,   badare,  

pensare,  tenere,  mirare,  aspirare,  concorrere,  tendere.  

 

If  the  first  class  is  taken  from  Levin  (1993),  the  second  one  is  not:  given  the  underlying  

meaning  of  all  the  verbs  in  b.,  it  was  thought  best  to  put  them  into  a  new  class  that  would  

encompass  the  common  thread,  namely  the  emotional  and  personal  involvement  of  the  

subject  in  the  achievement  of  the  action  described  by  the  verb.    

 

4.3.1.6.  NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{a}PP  /  NP_subj#V-­‐si#{a}inf  

 

This  alternation  is  one  of  the  two  alternations  in  this  section  that  brings  about  a  change  

in  the  syntactic  valency  of  the  verbs  that  allow  for  it:  in  one  of  the  possible  realisations,  

in  fact,   they  have  a  direct  object  and  an  indirect  one  realised  as  a  noun  (85a),  while   in  

the   other   one   they   take   the   pronominal   form   and   thus   display   only   the   indirect  

                                                                                                               53  To   contribute,   to   arrive,   to   give   up   on,   to   run   off,   to   reach,   to   provide,   to   play,   to   come,   to   be  careful,  to  think,  to  value,  to  come  back,  to  aim  at,  to  strive,  to  combine  to,  to  tend.  

Page 89: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  89  

argument  (85b),  which,  however,   is  realised  as  an  argumental  sentence.   In  spite  of  the  

very  different  syntactic  structures  involved,  the  indirect  argument  is  introduced  by  the  

preposition  a  (“to”)  in  both  possibilities:  

 

(85)   a.  Obbligammo  il  nemico  alla  resa  

  “We  forced  the  enemy  to  defeat”  

  b.  Mi  sono  obbligato  a  finire  il  libro  entro  l’anno  

  “I  have  forced-­‐pron  to  finish  the  book  within  the  year”  

 

The  verbs  in  our  sample  that  allow  this  alternation  are:  disporre,  convincere,  costringere,  

obbligare,   esercitare,   indurre,   abituare,   ridurre,   trattenere54,   and   they   all   belong   to   the  

VERBS  OF  SOCIAL  INTERACTION  class.    

  Moreover,  all  of   these  verbs  are  direct  reflexive  verbs,  which  means  that,   in  the  

pronominal  form,  the  pronoun  acts  as  a  direct  object  that  co-­‐refers  to  the  subject,  as  the  

paraphrase  of  (85b)  in  (86)  illustrates:  

 

(86)   Ho  obbligato  me  stesso  a  finire  il  libro  entro  l’anno    

  “I  have  forced  myself  to  finish  the  book  within  the  year”  

 

4.3.1.7.  NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{per}PP  /  NP_subj#V-­‐si#{per}inf  

 

This  alternation  is  similar  to  the  one  examined  in  4.3.1.6.,  in  more  than  one  respect:  not  

only  does  it  involve  a  change  in  the  syntactic  valence  of  verbs,  but  it  also  allows  for  the  

indirect   object   to   be   realised   as   a   noun   (87a)   or   as   an   argumental   sentence   (87b),  

introduced  in  both  cases  by  the  preposition  per  (“for,  to”):  

 

(87)   a.  Sto  preparando  i  bambini  per  la  scuola  

  “I’m  preparing  the  kids  for  school”  

  b.  Ci  stiamo  preparando  per  andare  a  cena  

  “We  are  preparing-­‐pron  to  go  for  dinner”  

 

                                                                                                               54  To  prepare,  to  convince,  to  force,  to  obligate,  to  accustom,  to   induce,  to  accustom,  to  reduce,  to  hold.    

Page 90: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  90  

The  verbs  in  our  sample  that  allow  for  this  alternation  are:  preparare  and  sacrificare55.  

Both  verbs  refer  to  actions  that  implicitly  tend  towards  a  final  purpose,  which  is  realised  

as   an   indirect   object   introduced   precisely   by   the   preposition   that,   in   Italian,   has   a  

“destinative-­‐final   value”   (Serianni   1989,   p.   350),   namely   per.   Moreover,   we   are   once  

again  presented  with  direct  reflexive  verbs  since  the  pronoun  in  (87b)  acts  as  a  semantic  

direct  object  co-­‐referring  to  the  subject,  as  its  possible  paraphrase  in  (88)  demonstrates:  

 

(88)   Stiamo  preparando  noi  stessi  per  andare  a  cena  

  “We  are  preparing  ourselves  to  go  for  dinner”  

 

4.3.1.8.  NP_subj#V-­‐si#{per}PP/  NP_subj#V-­‐si#{per}inf  

 

This  alternation  is  very  much  like  the  one  we  discussed  in  4.3.1.7:  they  both  involve  the  

indirect  object,  which   is   introduced  by   the  preposition  per   (“for,   to”)  and  alternatively  

realised  as  a  noun  (89a)  or  as  an  argumental  sentence  (89b).  However,  contrary  to  the  

previous   one,   this   alternation   presents   the   verb   in   the   pronominal   form   in   both  

possibilities:  

 

(89)   a.  Ci  organizzammo  per  un’escursione  

  “We  organised-­‐pron  for  a  field  trip”  

  b.  Ci  organizzammo  per  uscire  presto  il  mattino  

  “We  organised-­‐pron  to  leave  early  in  the  morning”  

 

Within   our   annotated   sample,   the   following   verbs   allowed   for   this   alternation:  

organizzare,  preparare,  sacrificare56.  As  expected,   they  overlap  with   those   found   in   the  

previous  alternation,  with  the  exception  of  organizzare57,  which,  according  to  S&C,  does  

not  allow  for  the  frame  illustrated  in  (87a),  therefore  not  taking  part  in  the  alternation  in  

4.3.1.7.    Lastly,  these  verbs  are  once  again  direct  reflexives.  

   

                                                                                                               55  To  prepare,  to  sacrifice.    56  To  organise,  to  prepare,  to  sacrifice.      57  The  verb  to  organise  is  by  far  the  least  prototypical  of  all,  allowing  for  an  interpretation  which  is   to   be   placed   somewhere   in   between   the   properly   direct   reflexive   one   and   the   properly  intensive  reflexive  one.    

Page 91: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  91  

4.3.1.9.  NP_subj#V-­‐si#{di}PP  /  NP_subj#V-­‐si#{di}inf  

 

In   this   alternation,   verbs   take   the   pronominal   form   in   both   realisations   and   the  

argument  affected  is  the  indirect  one,  which  can  be  expressed  as  a  noun  in  (90a),  or  as  

an  argumental  sentence  in  (90b),  but  introduced  by  the  preposition  di  (“of”)  in  both:  

 

(90)   a.  Mi  sono  dimenticato  del  tuo  compleanno  

  “I  have  forgotten-­‐pron  (of)  your  birthday”  

  b.  Mi  dimenticavo  di  farti  gli  auguri  

  “I  forgot-­‐pron  to  wish  you  happy  birthday”  

 

The   verbs   in   our   annotated   sample   that   allowed   for   this   alternation   are:   curare,  

convincere,   accusare,   assicurare,   pentirsi,   sorprendere,   occupare,   stupire,   ricordare,  

accontentare,  dimenticare,  incaricare,  accorgersi,  vantare58.  On  the  basis  of  Levin  (1993),  

the  possible  semantic  classes  can  be  identified:  

 

a.   PSYCH-­‐VERBS:   convincere,   accusare,   pentirsi,   sorprendere,   stupire,   ricordare,  

accontentare,  dimenticare,  accorgersi,  vantare;  

b.  VERBS  OF  SOCIAL  INTERACTION:  curare,  assicurare,  occupare,  incaricare.  

 

However,   a   second   classification   is   possible   if   we   select   as   a   valid   parameter   the  

semantic  value  of  the  pronoun  si,  which,  in  fact,  varies  greatly:  

 

I.  DIRECT  REFLEXIVE  VERBS:  convincere,  accusare,  incaricare.   In   these  cases,   the  pronoun  si  

does  act  as  a  semantic  direct  object,  co-­‐referring  to  the  subject,  as  the  paraphrase  of  (91)  

as  (92)  shows:  

 

(91)   Mi  accusai  del  delitto    

“I  accused-­‐pron  of  the  crime”  

(92)   Accusai  me  stesso  del  delitto  

 “I  accused  myself  of  the  crime”  

                                                                                                               58  To   take   care   of,   to   convince,   to   accuse,   to   make   sure,   to   repent,   to   surprise,   to   look   after,   to  astonish,  to  remember,  to  please,  to  forget,  to  appoint,  to  notice,  to  boast.    

Page 92: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  92  

II.  INTENSIVE  PRONOMINAL  VERBS:  curare,  assicurare,  pentirsi,  sorprendere,  occupare,  stupire,  

ricordare,  accontentare,  dimenticare,  accorgersi,  vantare.   In   relation   to   these  verbs,   the  

pronoun  si  does  not   function  as  a  semantic  argument,  but   it  simply   indicates  a  greater  

involvement  of  the  subject  in  the  action  described  by  the  verbs,  as  the  agrammaticality  

of  the  paraphrase  of  (93)  as  (94)  demonstrates:  

 

(93)    Non  mi  stupisco  più  delle  sue  affermazioni  

 “I  am  not  surprised-­‐pron  anymore  by  his  statements”  

(94)   *Non  stupisco  più  me  stesso  delle  sue  affermazioni  

 *“I  do  not  surprise  myself  anymore  of  his  statements”  

 

One  last  thing  worth  mentioning  in  relation  to  this  class  is  that    not   all   of   these   verbs  

show   the   same   pattern   in   the   corresponding   standard   form,   namely   the   one   with   a  

direct  object  and  the  verb  in  a  non-­‐pronominal  form.  First  of  all,  there  are  two  verbs  that  

exist   only   in   the  pronominal   form  and  do  not   have   a   non-­‐pronominal   realisation   (see  

Serianni  1989,  XI.24):  pentirsi  and  accorgersi.  Moreover,  while  some  verbs  still   imply  a  

degree   of   control   exerted   by   the   subject   (curare,   assicurare,   occupare,   vantare),   some  

others   do   not,   actually   conveying   a   sense   of   utter   lack   of   control   over   the   action   on  

behalf   of   the   subject   (sorprendere,   stupire,   ricordare,   dimenticare).   Lastly,   the   verb  

accontentare  is  somehow  different  from  all  the  others:  in  the  non-­‐pronominal  realisation  

it   describes   an   action   totally   controlled   by   the   subject   and   which   has   direct  

consequences  only  on  the  entity  represented  by  the  object,  without  the  possibility  of  a  

further  specification  (95a);  on  the  other  hand,  in  the  pronominal  variant  it  describes  an  

action  that,  in  a  certain  way,  the  subject  undergoes,  being  left  with  no  other  choice  than  

that  expressed  by  the  PP  (95b):  

   

(95)   a.  I  nonni  accontentano  spesso  i  nipoti  

   “Grandparents  often  please  grandchildren”  

   b.  Mi  accontenterei  del  terzo  posto  

   “I  would  please-­‐reflex  of  a  third  place”    

 

 

 

Page 93: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  93  

4.3.1.10.  NP_subj#V-­‐si#{che}fin  /  NP_subj#V-­‐si#{di}PP  

 

This  alternation  partly  overlaps  the  one  in  4.3.1.9.:  not  only  do  they  both  have  verbs  in  

the  pronominal  form,  but  they  also  involve  the  indirect  object,  which,  in  this  case,  can  be  

realised   as   a   noun   introduced   by   the   preposition   di   (“of”)   (96a),   or   as   an   argumental  

sentence   introduced   by   the   complementiser   che   (“that”)   and  with   the   verb   in   a   finite  

form  (96b):  

 

(96)   a.  Mi  assicurai  della  verità  delle  affermazioni  

  “I  verified-­‐pron  the  truth  of  the  statements”  

  b.  Mi  assicurai  che  tutto  sia  in  ordine  

  “I  verified-­‐pron  that  everything  is  in  order”  

 

As   one  would   expect,   the   verbs   in   our   sample   that   allow   for   this   alternation   partially  

coincide   with   those   found   in   4.3.1.9.:   convincere,   stupire,   assicurare,   ricordare,  

sorprendere,  accorgersi,  and  they  are  all  PSYCH-­‐VERBS.    

Moreover,  also   in   this   case   it   is  possible   to  put   forward  a  second  different   sub-­‐

classification  based  on  the  semantic  value  of  the  pronoun  si:  

 

I.  DIRECT  REFLEXIVE  VERBS:  convincere.  

II.  INTENSIVE  PRONOMINAL  VERBS:  stupire,  assicurare,  ricordare,  sorprendere,  accorgersi.  

 

4.3.1.11.  NP_subj#V-­‐si#{a}PP  /  NP_subj#V-­‐si#{a}inf  

 

This  alternation   is   to  be  paired  with   the  one   in  4.3.1.3.,  with   the  only  difference  being  

that,  in  this  case,  both  realisations  require  the  verb  to  be  in  the  pronominal  form.  In  both  

alternations,  however,  the  involved  argument  is  the  indirect  object,  which  is  introduced  

by  the  preposition  a  (“to”)  and  expressed  as  a  noun  (97a),  or  as  an  argumental  sentence  

(97b):  

 

 (97)   a.  Non  mi  presterei  mai  a  queste  cose  

  “I  would  never  lend-­‐pron  to  these  things”  

   

Page 94: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  94  

  b.  Ti  presteresti  a  sostenere  le  spese?  

  “Would  you  lend-­‐pron  to  support  the  expenses?”  

 

The   verbs   in   our   sample   that   allow   for   this   alternation   are:   preparare,   rilanciare,  

costringere,   determinare,   obbligare,   prestare,   rassegnare,   abbassare,   rimettere,   disporre,  

adattare,  abituare,  ridurre,  indurre59  and  they  can  all  be  classified  as  VERBS  OF  SOCIAL  

INTERACTION.    

  Moreover,  with   the   exception   of   rassegnare,  which,   in   the   standard   form  has   a  

completely  different  meaning  (“to  resign”),  all  the  verbs  listed  above  are  direct  reflexive  

verbs,  which  means   that,  once  again,   the  pronoun  si   acts  as   the  semantic  direct  object  

that  co-­‐refers  to  the  subject,  as  the  possibility  of  paraphrasing  (97b)  as  (98)  confirms:  

 

(98)   Presteresti  te  stesso  a  sostenere  le  spese?  

  “Would  you  lend  yourself  to  support  the  expenses?”  

 

4.3.2.  Alternations  taking  place  in  the  subject  position    

 

In  all  the  cases  we  present  in  this  section,  verbs  allow  their  subject  to  be  realised  either  

as  an  argumental   clause  or  as  a  noun;  moreover,  all   the  verbs   that  allow  the  syntactic  

structures   examined   below   are   unaccusative   intransitive   verbs   and,   in   the   realisation  

with   the   argumental   sentence,   they   act   as   impersonal   verbs,   thus   taking   only   a   third  

person  singular  inflection.    

 

4.3.2.1.  NP_subj#V#{da}PP  /  NP_subj{che}fin#V#{da}PP  

 

This   alternation   takes   place   in   the   subject   position,   which   can   be   realized   as   a   noun  

(99a)  or  as  an  argumental  sentence  introduced  by  the  complementiser  che  (“that”)  and  

with  the  verb  in  a  finite  form  (99b):  

   

(99)   a.  Dalle  tue  parole  non  consegue  niente  di  buono  

  “From  your  words  nothing  good  follows”    

                                                                                                               59  To  prepare,  to  restart,  to  force,  to  induce,  to  force,  to  lend,  to  put  up  with,  to  lower,  to  start  again,  to  get  ready,  to  adjust,  to  accustom,  to  reduce,  to  persuade.    

Page 95: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  95  

  b.  Da  ciò  consegue  che  non  è  possibile  partire  

  “From  this  follows-­‐impers  that  leaving  is  not  possible”  

 

There  were  only   two  verbs   in  our  sample   that  allowed   for   this  alternation:  conseguire  

and  risultare60.  As  for  the  verbs  in  4.1.2.1.,  they  can  be  classified  as  IMPERSONAL  VERBS  

REQUIRING  NOUN  CLAUSES.  

 

4.3.2.2.  NP_subj#V#{a}PP  /  NP_subj{che}fin#V#{a}PP  

 

This  alternation  parallels  the  one  we  discussed  in  4.1.2.3.,  with  the  only  difference  being  

that,   in   this   case,   the   subject   can   be   realised   as   a   noun   (100a)   or   as   an   argumental  

sentence   introduced   by   the   complementiser   che   (“that”)   and  with   the   verb   in   a   finite  

form  (100b):  

 

(100)   a.  A  nessuno  importano  queste  sciocchezze!  

  “To  nobody  matter  these  silly  things!”  

  b.  Ai  ragazzi  importa  che  tu  sia  qui  con  noi    

  “To  the  guys  matters-­‐impers  that  you  are  here  with  us”  

 

The   verbs   in   our   annotated   sample   that   allowed   for   this   alternation   are:   risultare,  

capitare,   importare,   dispiacere,   sfuggire,   convenire61.   As   for   the   verbs   in   4.1.2.3.,   we  

propose  the  novel  class  HAPPEN  VERBS.    

However,  the  two  alternations  need  to  be  kept  apart,  as  demonstrated  by  the  fact  

that  not  all  the  verbs  that  allow  for  one,  also  allow  for  the  other  one:  capitare,  importare  

and  sfuggire,  in  fact,  do  not  allow  for  the  realisation  with  the  zero  infinitive  clause:  

 

(101)   *A  tutti  capita  perdere  la  pazienza  

  *“To  everybody  happens-­‐impers  lose  their  patience”    

 

 

 

                                                                                                               60  To  result,  to  follow.    61  To  result,  to  happen,  to  matter,  to  be  sorry,  to  elude,  to  be  convenient.  

Page 96: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  96  

4.3.2.3.  NP_subj#V#{a}PP  /  NP_subj{0}inf#V#{a}PP  

 

This   alternation   presents   the   reverse   situation   of   the   one   discussed   in   the   previous  

paragraph,   allowing   the   subject   to   be   realised   as   either   a   noun   (102a)   or   as   a   zero  

infinitive  clause  (102b):  

 

(102)   a.  Mi  preme  solo  la  tua  felicità  

  “To  me  matters-­‐impers  only  your  happiness”  

  b.  “A  noi  tutti  preme  essere  presenti”  

  “To  all  of  us  matters-­‐impers  be-­‐inf  present”  

 

Within   our   sample,   the   following   verbs   allowed   for   this   alternation:   stare,   spettare,  

risultare,  capitare,  dispiacere,  premere,  convenire62.  Once  again,  we  propose  to  establish  

an  original  semantic  class,  which  we  call  0-­‐INFINITIVE  HAPPEN  VERBS.    

 

4.3.3.  Alternations  requiring  predicative  complements  

 

This  final  section  is  dedicated  to  those  alternations  we  found  that  involve  a  predicative  

complement:  in  all  the  cases  discussed  below,  the  alternation  concerns  the  direct  object,  

which  can  be  realised  as  a  noun  or  as  an  argumental  sentence.    

As  we  will   see  more   in   depth   in   each   specific   case,   some   alternations   are   also  

responsible   for   a   change   in   the   syntactic   valency   of   the   verbs   that   allow   for   it,   while  

some   others   are   not.   However,   regardless   of   their   idiosyncratic   peculiarities,   they   all  

require  a  predicative  complement.  

  Moreover,   the   verbs   in   our   annotated   sample   that   allowed   for   the   following  

alternations   are   always   the   same:   credere,   considerare   and   giudicare63.   These   verbs  

belong   to   the   class   traditionally   known   as   “copulative   verbs”,   which   encompasses   all  

those  verbs  that  express  a  state  of  being,  rather  than  an  action,  and  that,  in  order  to  do  

so,  require  a  predicative  complement.  More  in  depth,  the  three  verbs  in  question  belong  

to  the  subclass  of  “estimative  verbs”  (Serianni  1989,  XI.6-­‐d).  

 

                                                                                                               62  To  be  up  to,  to  concern,  to  result,  to  happen,  to  be  sorry,  to  matter,  to  be  convenient.  63  To  believe,  to  consider,  to  judge.    

Page 97: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  97  

4.3.3.1.  NP_subj#V#NP_obj#Cpred  /  NP_subj#V#{0}inf#Cpred  

 

The  first  alternation  takes  place  in  the  direct  object  position,  which  can  be  syntactically  

expressed   as   a   noun   (103a)   or   as   an   argumental   clause   introduced   by   the   zero  

complementiser  (103b):  

 

(103)   a.  Vi  credevo  sinceri  

  “I  believed  you  sincere”  

  b.  Ho  creduto  opportuno  agire  in  questo  modo  

  “I  believed  right  act-­‐inf  in  this  way”  

 

4.3.3.2.  NP_subj#V#NP_obj#Cpred  /  NP_subj#V#{che}fin#Cpred  

 

This  alternation  once  again  concerns  the  direct  object,  which,  as  seen  in  4.3.3.1.,  can  be  

realised   as   a   noun   (104a),   but,   contrary   to   the   previous   alternation,   also   as   an  

argumental  sentence  introduced  by  the  complementiser  che   (“that”)  and  with  the  verb  

in  a  finite  form  (104b):  

 

(104)   a.  Lo  considero  il  miglior  giocatore  del  mondo  

  “I  consider  him  the  best  player  in  the  world”  

  b.  Considero  sconveniente  che  tu  rimanga  qui  

  “I  consider  inappropriate  that  you  remain  here”    

 

4.3.3.3.  NP_subj#V#{0}inf#Cpred  /  NP_subj#V-­‐si#Cpred  

 

The  third  alternation  still  involves  the  direct  object,  but,  contrary  to  the  ones  discussed  

in  the  previous  paragraphs,  it  also  brings  about  a  change  in  the  syntactic  valence  of  the  

verbs   that   allow   for   it.   In   fact,   in   the   first   realisation   allowed,   the   direct   object   is  

expressed  as  a  zero  infinitive  clause  (105a),  while,  in  the  second  one,  the  verb  takes  the  

prenominal  form,  acting  as  the  semantic  object  (105b):  

 

(105)   a.  Ho  giudicato  opportuno  agire  cosi  

  “I  judged  adequate  act-­‐inf  like  this”  

Page 98: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  98  

    b.  Si  giudica  furbo  

  “He  judges-­‐pron  smart”  

 

Given  the  semantic  value  of  the  pronoun  si  in  the  pronominal  realisation,  the  three  verbs  

that  allow  this  alternation  are  direct  reflexives,  and,  as  in  all  the  cases  illustrated  so  far,  

the  following  paraphrase  of  (105b)  is  possible:  

 

(106)   Giudica  se  stesso  furbo  

  “He  judges  himself  smart”  

 

4.3.3.4.  NP_subj#V#{che}fin#Cpred  /  NP_subj#V-­‐si#Cpred  

 

As  the  alternation  presented  din  the  previous  paragraph,  also  the  one  we  discuss  here  

allows   for   a   pronominal   realisation   in  which   the   pronoun   si   acts   as   a   semantic   direct  

object   (107b).   however,   contrary   to   the   alternation   in  4.3.3.3.   and   very  much   like   the  

one  in  4.3.3.2.,  it  also  allows  for  a  realisation  in  which  the  direct  object  is  expressed  as  an  

argumental  clause  introduced  by  the  complementiser  che  (“that”)  and  with  the  verb  in  a  

finite  form  (107a):  

 

 (107)   a.  Credo  giusto  che  tu  vada  in  persona  

  “I  believe  right  that  you  go  in  person”  

  b.  Mario  si  crede  il  più  bravo  di  tutti  

  “Mario  believes  himself  the  best”  

 

One   last   thing   to   note   is   that,   even   in   this   case,   they   are  direct   reflexive   verbs,   as   the  

paraphrase  of  (107b)  shows:  

 

(108)        Mario  crede  se  stesso  il  più  bravo  di  tutti  

  “Mario  believes  himself  the  best”  

 

 

 

 

Page 99: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  99  

Conclusions  

 

This  thesis  investigated  argument  alternations  in  Italian,  with  the  aim  of  providing  new  

insights   on  what   is   unanimously   considered   a   complex   linguistic   phenomenon,   to   the  

extent   that   its   theoretical   status   is   still   today   hotly   discussed   by   all   the   different  

frameworks  involved  in  the  ongoing  debate.    

After   a   manual   annotation   of   a   sample   consisting   of   the   1000   most   frequent  

Italian  verbs  derived  from  a  lexicographic  resource,  and  a  semi-­‐automatic  extraction  of  

the  argument  alternations   they  allow,  we  were   finally  able   to  single  out   those  of   them  

that   could   actually   be   construed   as  proper   instantiations   of   this  widespread   aspect   of  

natural  languages.  

Our  findings  provided  us  with  a  total  of  37  valid  argument  alternations  for  Italian  

(Fig.6,  Fig.  7,  Fig.  8),  some  of  which  could  even  be  further  sub-­‐divided  into  finer-­‐graded  

clusters.  The  broader  classification  we  proposed  is  based  on  the  syntactic  properties  of  

the  arguments  involved  in  the  alternations  we  found,  and  it  is  made  up  of  three  different  

classes,  divided  as  follows  (Fig.5):  

 

1)  Argumental  sentence  alternations:  these  alternation  involve  a  set  of  arguments  

that  are  both  expressed  by   so-­‐called   “argumental   sentences”,  namely   sentences  

that  act  as  arguments  saturating  the  syntactic  and  semantic  valence  of  verbs;  

2)   Alternations   involving   a   noun   or   prepositional   phrase   (NP   or   PP):   in   these  

alternations,   verbs   often   undergo   a   change   in   their   syntactic   valency   and   the  

arguments  affected  are  either  noun  phrases  (NN)  or  prepositional  phrases  (PP);  

3)  Alternations  involving  an  argumental  sentence  and  a  phrase  complement  (NP  or  

PP):  in  these  alternations,  verbs  allow  two  realisations  of  one  of  their  arguments,  

which,  in  one  case,  is  expressed  as  a  noun  phrase  (NP)  or  a  prepositional  phrase  

(PP),  replaced  in  the  other  one  by  an  argumental  sentence.    

 

As  we  have  already  argued,  these  results  are  only  partial  and  could  not  be  further  

from  being  considered  definitive:  the  first  thing  to  do  would  be  to  enlarge  the  sample  of  

verbs   examined,   so   that   more   subcategorisation   frames   could   be   identified   and,  

consequently,  more  potential  argument  alternations  would  emerge  and,  moreover,  new  

senses  for  the  alternations  already  singled  out  would  be  available.    

Page 100: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  100  

The   analysis   reported   in   this   thesis   moved   from   data   extracted   from   a   lexical  

resource,  namely  a  manually  built  dictionary.  However,  it  would  be  important  to  acquire  

information   about   subcategorisation   frames   and   their   frequency,   as   well   as   about  

argument   alternations,   also   from   large   corpora:   in   this   way,   we   would   be   able   to  

integrate   the   precise,   but   somehow   limited   information   derived   from   a   lexicographic  

resource,  born  out  of  the  intuitions  of  the  lexicographer,  with  that  obtained  from  more  

objective   but   also   noisier   broad-­‐coverage   corpora.   Hence,   an   interesting   extension   of  

this  work  would  be  the  application  of  our  method  to  data  extracted  from  different  kinds  

of   collections  of   “real  world”   texts,   such  as   spontaneous   sentence  production   corpora,  

technical   language   corpora,   child   speech   corpora   and,   possibly,   second   language  

learners  production  corpora.  Such  analysis  could  cast  more   light  on   this  phenomenon,  

providing  at  once  a  larger  quantity  of  verbs  and  a  more  variegated  use  of  their  senses  in  

case   of   polysemy.   The   exploitation   of   psycholinguistic-­‐derived   data,   moreover,   could  

reveal   interesting   patterns   of   development   in   the   acquisition   and,   possibly,   loss   of  

argument   alternations,   which,   in   turn,   could   provide   valuable   insights   on   the   nature  

and/or  the  organisation  of  the  language  faculty.  

Finally,  one  more  aspect  that  future  research  will  have  to  focus  on  is  the  semantic  

classification   of   Italian   verbs   based   on   the   argument   alternations   they   allow,   in   a  

manner   similar   to   that   followed   by   Levin   (1993).   Every   time   it   was   possible,   we   did  

attempt   a   classification   of   verbs,   mainly   exploiting   the   semantic   classes   available   in  

Levin,  but  also  putting  forward  new  ones  when  strictly  Italian  phenomena  did  not  find  a  

suitable  match   in   English.   However,   a   complete   semantic   classification   of   verbs   is   no  

small  task  and  many  issues  have  to  be  taken  into  account,  from  the  identification  of  the  

facets  of  meaning  responsible   for  the  syntactic  realisations  examined,   to  the   inevitable  

theoretical   challenges   posited   by   finer-­‐graded   divisions.   We   will   leave   to   future  

investigations   the   challenge   of   developing   a   coherent   and   extensive   semantic  

classification  of  Italian  verbs  based  on  their  syntactic  behaviour.  

Notwithstanding  the  inevitable  limitations  of  our  thesis,  our  work  is  intended  as  

a  first  step  that  will  encourage  further  research  on  the  behaviour  of  Italian  verbs  at  the  

syntactic-­‐semantic   interface,  which  would  ultimately  benefit   at  once  different   areas  of  

current  linguistic  research,  such  as  theoretical  linguistics,  computational  linguistics  and  

psycholinguistics.        

 

Page 101: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  101  

Figure  5:  Argum

ent  alternations  in  Italian  

 

Page 102: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  102  

 

 

 

Figure  6:  Argum

ental  sentence  alternations  

 

Page 103: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  103  

Figure  7:  Alternations  involving  a  noun  or  a  prepositional  phrase  (NP  or  PP)  

 

Page 104: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  104  

Figure  8:  Alternations  involving  an  argum

ental  sentence  and  a  phrase  com

plem

ent  (NP  or  PP)  

 

Page 105: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  105  

Acknowledgments  

 

This   thesis   is   the   outcome  of   three   long   years   that,   to   a   large   extent,   I  wish  had   gone  

differently.  However,  there  are  people  who  deserve  to  be  thanked  and  who  are  worth  all  

my  respect  and  gratitude.      

First  of  all,   I  want   to   thank  my  supervisor  Prof.  Alessandro  Lenci   for  showing  me   that  

everything   can   be   interesting   and   challenging   –   even   Computational   Linguistics   –,   as  

long   as   it   is   taught   and   approached  with   love,   passion   and   curiosity.   His   sincere   and  

thorough  support,   along  with  an   impeccable  work  ethics,   encouraged  me   to  become  a  

better  linguist,  accepting  that  I  will  never  know  enough,  and  that  it  is  ok  not  to  in  order  

to  become  a  good  researcher.      

I  am  also  thankful  to  my  co-­‐supervisor  Prof.  Giovanna  Marotta,  who  agreed  to  take  part  

in   this   work   at   a   short   notice,   nonetheless   showing   great   enthusiasm   and   genuine  

interest  for  the  subject  of  this  thesis.    

I  would  like  to  thank  my  external  examiner  Doc.  Gianluca  Lebani,  whose  generous  help  

throughout   the  writing   of   this   thesis  was   constant,  meticulous   and   simply   invaluable.  

Also,   during   my   time   at   the   Laboratory   of   Computational   Linguistics,   he   patiently  

supervised  my  unsuccessful   attempts   to  develop  any   sort   of   informatical   skills,   kindly  

waiting   until   I   eventually   gave   up   altogether   (which   happened   regularly,  much   to   his  

amusement).  

Moreover,   a   huge   thank   goes   to  Alice,   Francesca   and   Irene,   three   young  women  who,  

each  in  a  different  way,  will  be  forever  associated  with  this  journey:  they  are  responsible  

for   filling   these  years  with  endless  coffee  breaks  and  random  gatherings  during  which  

doubts,   laughter   and   hopes   were   evenly   shared.   You   made   bearable   what   otherwise  

would  have  not  been  so.  

This   thesis   would   have   never   existed   if   it   had   not   been   for   my   unconventionally  

extraordinary   family.   I   owe  my  parents   a  debt   I   could  never,   ever   repay:  not  only  did  

they  allow  me  to  go  to  University  for  a  second  time,  but  they  never  stopped  having  faith  

in  me,  not  even  when  I  gave  them  good  reasons  to.  They  offered  help  and  support,  but  

never  once  imposed  any  decision  of  theirs  on  me,  and  they  are  still  allowing  me,  day  by  

day,  to  turn  into  the  person  I  choose  to  be.  Also,  I  was  blessed  with  the  most  extravagant  

and  generous  sister  and  the  smartest  most  loving  brother:  they  managed  to  put  up  with  

me   for   26   and   14   years   respectively,   at  my   best   and  my  worst,   getting   on  my  nerves  

Page 106: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  106  

every  now  and  then,  but  still  rooting  for  me  every  step  of  the  way,  no  matter  what,  the  

way  only  siblings  can  do.    

Last,   but   definitely   not   least,   I   wish   to   thank   Emmet,   whose   endless   patience   and  

unconditional  love  literally  made  it  possible  for  me  to  get  here  today:  he  kept  things  in  

perspective,  always  offering  a  positive  view  -­‐  even  when  I  did  not  think  it  possible  -­‐  and  

a   safe   shelter   every   time   a   new   storm   hit.   His   kind   Irish   nature   and   his   genuine   and  

devoted   passion   for   everything   he   does   have   been   inspiring  me   to   not   just   become   a  

better  linguist,  but  a  better  human  being  and,  for  that,  I  could  never  thank  him  enough.  

Go  raibh  mile  maith  agaibh.    

 

                                                                   

Page 107: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  107  

Bibliography  

 

Agrell,   S.   (1908),  Aspektänderung  und  Aktionsartbildung  beim  polnischen  Zeitworte:  Ein  

Beitrag   zum   Studium   derindogermanischen   Präverbia   und   ihrer  

Bedeutungsfunktionen,  Lunds  Universitets  Arsskrift,  new  series,  I,  iv.2.  

Arsenijević,  B.,  Gehrke,  B.,  Marín,  R.  (2013),  “The  (De)composition  of  Event  Predicates”,  

in   Studies   in   the   Composition   and   Decomposition   of   Event   Predicates,   B.  

Arsenijević,  B.  Gehrke  and  R.  Marín,  R.  (eds.),  Springer,  Dordrecht,  pp.  1-­‐26.      

Baker,   C   F.,   Fillmore,   C.   J.   &   Lowe,   J.   B.   (1998),   “The   Berkerley   FrameNet   Project,   in  

Proceedings   of   the   17th   International   Conference   on   Computational   Linguistics,  

Montreal,  pp.  86-­‐90.  

Baroni,  M.,  Bernardini,  S.,  Comastri,  F.,  Piccioni,  L.,  Volpi,  A.,  Aston  G.  and  M.  Mazzoleni  

(2004),   “Introducing   the   la   Repubblica   corpus:   A   large,   annotated,   TEI(XML)-­‐

compliant   corpus   of   newspaper   Italian”,   in   Proceedings   of   the     Fourth  

International   Conference   on   Language   Resources   and   Evaluation   (LREC’04),  

Lisbon,  24-­‐30  May  2004,  pp.  1771-­‐1774.  

Beavers,   J.   T.   (2006),   “Argument/Oblique   Alternations   and   the   Structure   of   Lexical  

Meaning”,  Doctoral  Thesis,  Stanford  University.  

Berruto,  G.  (1976),  La  Semantica,  Zanichelli,  Bologna.  

Bresnan,   J.   (ed.)   (1982),  The  Mental  Representations  of  Grammatical  Relations,  The  MIT  

Press,  Cambridge  Mass.  

Cann,   R.,   Kempson,   R.   &   Gregoromichelaki,   E.   (2009),   Semantics.   An   Introduction   to  

Meaning  in  Language,  Cambridge  University  Press,  Cambridge.  

Carrier,   J.  &  Randall,   J.  H.   (1992),   “”The  Argument  Structure  and  Syntactic  Structure  of  

Resultatives”,  Linguistic  Theories  23,  pp.  173-­‐234.  

Cennamo,  M.  (forthcoming),  “Valency  Patterns  in  Italian”.    

Chomsky,  N.  (1957),  Syntactic  Structures,  Mouton,  The  Hague.  

Chomsky,  N.  (1965),  Aspects  of  the  Theory  of  Syntax,  The  MIT  Press,  Cambridge  MA.  

Chomsky,  N.  (1981),  Lectures  on  Government  and  Binding,  Foris,  Dordrecht.  

Page 108: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  108  

Chomsky,   N.   (1986),  Knowledge  of  Language:   Its  Nature,  Origin  and  Use,   Praeger,   New  

York.  

Choi,   S.   &   Bowerman,   M.   (1991),   “Learning   to   express   motion   events   in   English   and  

Korean:  The  influence  of  language-­‐specific  lexicalization  patterns”,  Cognition,  41  

(1-­‐3),  pp.  83–121.  

Cole,  P.  (1987),  “Null  Objects  in  Universal  Grammar”,  Linguistic  Inquiry  18,  pp.  597–612.  

Comrie,  B.  (1976),  Aspect,  Cambridge  University  Press,  Cambridge.  

Croch,   D.   &   King,   T.   H.   (2005),   “Unifying   Lexical   Resources”,   in   Proceedings   of  

Interdisciplinary   Workshop   on   the   Identification   and   Representation   of   Verb  

Features  and  Verb  Classes,  Saarbrücken,  Germany.    

Dang,   H.   T.   (2004),   “Investigations   into   the   Role   of   Lexical   Semantics   in  Word   Sense  

Disambiguation,  Doctoral  Thesis,  CIS,  University  of  Pennsylvania.    

Davidson,  D.  (1980),  “The  logical  form  of  action  and  sentences”,  in  D.  Davidson,  Essays  on  

Actions  and  Events,  Clarendon  Press,  Oxford,  pp.  105-­‐148.    

De  Saussure,  F.  (1916  (1955),  Cours  de  Linguistique  Générale,  Payot,  Paris.  DeLancey,   S.   (1995),   “Verbal   Case   Frames   in   English   and   Tibetan”,   unpublished   ms.  

Department  of  Linguistics,  University  of  Oregon,  Eugene  OR.  

Dik,  S.  C.  (1978),  Functional  Grammar,  North-­‐Holland,  Amsterdam.  

Dik,  S.  C.  (1989  (1997)),  The  Theory  of  Functional  Grammar.  The  Structure  of  the  Clause,  

ed.  by  Kees  Hengeveld,  Mouton  de  Gruyter,  Berlin.  

Dik,  S.  C.  (1997),  The  Theory  of  Functional  Grammar:  Complex  and  Derived  Structures,  ed.  

by  Kees  Hengeveld,  Mouton  de  Gruyter,  Berlin.  

Dowty,  D.  (1979),  Word  Meaning  and  Montague  Grammar,  Reidel,  Dordrecht.  

Dowty,   D.   (1991),   “Thematic   Proto-­‐Roles   and   Argument   Selection”,   Language   67,   pp.  

547-­‐619.  

Dowty,   D.   (2000),   “’The   garden   swarms   with   bees’   and   the   fallacy   of   ‘argument  

alternation’”,  in  Polysemy:  theoretical  and  computational  approaches,  Y.  Ravin  and  

C.  Leacock  (eds.),  Oxford  University  Press,  Oxford,  pp.  111-­‐128.  

Page 109: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  109  

Dowty,   D.   (2001),   “The   semantic   asymmetry   of   argument   alternations   (and   why   it  

matters)”,   in   Making   Sense:   From   Lexeme   to   Discourse,   in   honor   of   Werner  

Abraham   at   the   occasion   of   his   retirement   (Groninger   Arbeiten   zur  

germanistischen  Linguistik  Nr.  44),  G.  van  der  Meer  and  A.  G.  B.  ter  Meulen  (eds.),  

Center  for  Language  and  Cognition  Groningen,  Groningen,  pp.  171-­‐86.  

Fellbaum,   C   (ed.)   (1998),   “WordNet:   An   electronic   lexical   database”,  Language,   speech  

and  communications,  MIT  Press,  Cambridge  MA.  

Fillmore,  C.  J.  (1968),  “The  case  for  case”,  in  Universals  in  Linguistic  Theory,  E.  Bach  &  R.  

T.  Harms  (eds.),  Holt,  Rinehart  and  Winston,  New  York,  pp.  1-­‐88.  

Fillmore,   C.   J.   (1970),   “The   Grammar   of   Hitting   and   Breaking”,   in  Readings   in   English  

Transformational  Grammar,  R.  A.  Jacobs  and  P.  S.  Rosenbaum  (eds.),  Ginn  and  Co.,  

Waltham  MA,  Toronto,  London,  pp.  120-­‐133.  

Fillmore,  C.  J.  (1971a),  “Some  Problems  for  Case  Grammar”,  in  Report  of  the  22nd  Annual  

Roundtable   Meeting   on   Linguistics   and   Language   Studies,   R.   J.   O’Brien   (ed.),  

Georgetown  University  Press,  Washington,  DC,  pp.  35-­‐56.    

Fillmore,  C.  J.  (1971b),  “Types  of  Lexical  Information”,  in  Semantics,  D.  Steinberg  and  L.  

Jakobovits  (eds.),  Cambridge  University  Press,  Cambridge,  pp.  370-­‐392.  

Fillmore,  C.  J.  (1977),  “The  Case  for  Case  Reopened”,  in  Grammatical  Relations,  P.  Cole  &  

M.  Sadock  (eds.),  Academic,  New  York,  San  Francisco,  London.    

Fillmore,   C.   J.   (2008),   “The   Merging   of   ‘Frames’”,   in   Frames,   Corpora,   and   Knowledge  

Representation,  R.  Rossini  Favretti  (ed.),  Bononia  University  Press,  Bologna,  pp.  1-­‐

12.  

Fodor,   J.   A.   (1983),   Modularity   of   Mind:   An   Essay   on   Faculty   Psychology,   MIT   Press,  

Cambridge  Mass.  

Geeraerts,  D.  (2010),  Theories  of  Lexical  Semantics,  Oxford  University  Press,  Oxford.    

Giovanardi,  C.  (1986),  “Subordinazione:  di  +  infinito”,  in  Parallela  2.  Aspetti  della  sintassi  

dell’italiano   contemporaneo,   K.   Lichem   et   al.   (eds.),   Atti   del   III   Convegno   italo-­‐

austriaco  SLI,  Graz,  28-­‐31  Maggio  1984,  Tubingen,  Narr,  (1986),  pp.  105-­‐  118.    

Goldberg,   A.   E.   &   Jackendoff,   R.   (2004),   “The   English   Resultative   as   a   Family   of  

Constructions”,  Language  90,  pp.  532-­‐568.  

Page 110: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  110  

Graffi,  G.  (1994),  Sintassi,  Il  Mulino,  Bologna.    

Green,  G.  (1973),  “A  Syntactic  Sincretism  in  English  and  French”,  in  Issues  in  Linguistics,  

B.  Kachru,  R.  B.  Lees,  Y.  Malkiel,  A.  Pietrangeli  and  S.  Saporta  (eds.),  University  of  

Illinois  Press,  Urbana,  IL,  pp.  257-­‐278.  

Greimas,  A.   J.   (1966),  Sémantique  structurale:  recherche  de  méthode,   Libraire  Larousse,  

Paris.  

Grimshaw,   J.   (1979),   “Complement   Selection   and   the   Lexicon”,   in   Linguistic   Enquiry  

Volume,  10-­‐2,  pp.  279-­‐326.      

Grimshaw,  J.  (1990),  Argument  Structure,  The  IMT  Press,  Cambridge  Mass.  

Gropen,   J.,   Pinker,   S.,   Hollander,   M.   &   Goldberg,   R.   (1989),   “The   Learnability   and  

Acquisition  of  the  Dative  Alternation  in  English”,  Language  65,  pp.  203-­‐257.  

Gruber,  J.  (1965),  Studies  in  Lexical  Relations,  Doctoral  Dissertation,  MIT,  Cambridge  MA.    

Gruber,  J.  (1976),  Lexical  Structures  in  Syntax  and  Semantics,  North  Holland,  Amsterdam.  

Guerssel,   M.,   Hale,   K.,   Laughren,   M.,   Levin,   B.   and   White   Eagle,   J.   (1985),   “A   Cross-­‐

linguistic   study   of   Transitivity   Alternations”,   in   Papers   from   the   Parasession   on  

Causatives  and  Agentivity,  Chicago  Linguistic  Society,  Chicago  IL,  pp.  48-­‐63.  

Hale,   K.   L.   &   Keyser,   S.   J.   (1987),   “A   View   from   the   Middle”,   Lexicon   Project  Working  

Papers  10,  Center  for  Cognitive  Science,  MIT,  Cambridge  MA.  

Hall,  B.   (1965),   “Subject   and  Object   in  English”,  Doctoral  Dissertation,  MIT,  Cambridge  MA.  

Haspelmath,   M.   (1993),   "More   on   the   typology   of   inchoative/causative   verb  

alternations",   in   Causatives   and   transitivity.   (Studies   in   Language   Companion  

Series,  23.),    B.  Comrie  &  M.  Polinsky  (eds.),  Benjamins,  Amsterdam,  pp.  87-­‐120.  

Hensman,   S.   &   Dunnion,   J.   (2004),   “Automatically   Building   Conceptual   Graphs   Using  

VerbNet   and   WordNet”,   in   Proceedings   of   the   3rd   International   Symposium   on  

Information  and  Communication  Technologies,  Las  Vegas,  NV,  pp.  115-­‐120.  

Hjelmslev,   L.   (1957),     “Pour   une   sémantique   structurale”,   in   L.   Hjelmslev,   Essais  

linguistiques  (1959),  Les  Editions  des  Minuit,  Paris.    

Hjelmslev,   L.   (1961),   Prolegomena   to   a   Theory   of   Language   (1943),   The   University   of  

Wisconsin  Press,  Madison.  

Page 111: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  111  

Hovy,  E.,  Marcus,  M.,  Palmer,  M.,  Ramshaw,  L.  &  Weischedel,  R.  (2006),  “OntoNotes:  The  

90%  solution”,  in  Proceedings  of  HLT-­‐NAACL06,  pp.  57–60.  

Huang,  Y.  (1995),  “On  Null  Subjects  and  Null  Objects  in  Generative  Grammar”,  Linguistics  

33,  pp.  1081–1123.  

Jackendoff,   R.   S.   (1972),   Semantic   Interpretation   in   Generative   Grammar,   MIT   Press,  

Cambridge  Mass.  

Jackendoff,   R.   S.   (1976),   “Toward   an  Explanatory   Semantic  Representation”,  Linguistic  

Inquiry  7,  pp.  89-­‐150.  

Jackendoff,  R.  S.  (1983),  Semantics  and  Cognition,  MIT  Press,  Cambridge  MA.    

Ježek,  E.  (2003),  Classi  di  Verbi  tra  Semantica  e  Sintassi,  Edizioni  ETS,  Pisa.  

Ježek,  E.  (2005),  Lessico,  Il  Mulino,  Bologna.    

Keller,  F.  &  Lapata,  M.  (1998),  “Object  Drop  and  Discourse  Accessibility”,  in  Proceedings  

of  the  17th  West  Coast  Conference  on  Formal  Linguistics,  K.  Shahin,  S.  Blake  and  E.  

Kim  (eds.),  Stanford:  CSLI  Publications,  pp.  362-­‐374.  

Koening,   J.   &   Davis,   A.   R.   (2006),   “The   KEY   to   Lexical   Semantic   Representations”,   in  

Journal  of  Linguistics  42,  pp.  71-­‐108.  

Lakoff,  G.  (1977),  “Linguistic  Gestalts”,  in  Papers  from  the  Thirteenth  Regional  Meeting  of  

the  Chicago  Linguistic  Society,  Chicago  Linguistic  Society,  Chicago,  pp.  236-­‐287.  

Lenci,   A.   (2009),   “Argument   alternations   in   Italian   verbs:   A   computational   study”,   in  

Linguaggio   e   cervello   –   Semantica   /   Language   and   the   brain   –   Semantics,   V.  

Bambini,   I.  Ricci,  P.  M.  Bertinetto  &  Collaborators   (eds.),  Atti  del  XLII  Convegno  

della   Società   di   Linguistica   Italiana   (Pisa,   Scuola   Normale   Superiore,   25-­‐27  

settembre  2008),  vol.  2,  Bulzoni,  Roma.  

Lenci,   A.,   Lapesa,   G.   and   Bonansiga,   G.   (2012),   “LexIt:   A   Computational   Resource   on  

Italian   Argument   Alternations”,   in   Proceedings   of   the   Eight   International  

Conference  on  Language  Resources  and  Evaluation  (LREC’12),  Istanbul,  23-­‐25  May  

2012,  pp.  3712-­‐3718.  

Lenci,  A.  (in  press),  “Carving  Verb  Classes  from  Corpora"  in  Word  Classes,  R.  Simone  and  

F.  Masini  (eds.),  John  Benjamins,  Amsterdam-­‐Philadelphia.  

Page 112: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  112  

Lepschy,   A.   L.   &   Lepschy,   G.   C.   (1986),   La   Lingua   Italiana.   Storia,   varieta’   dell’uso,  

grammatica,  Bompiani,  Milano.  

Levin,  B.  (1993),  English  Verb  Classes  and  Alternations,  The  University  of  Chicago  Press,  

Chicago.    

Levin,  B.  &  Rappaport  Hovav,  M.   (1998),   “Building  verb  meaning”,   in  The  Projection  of  

Arguments:   Lexical   and  Compositional   factors,   M.   Butt   &  W.  Geuder   (eds.),   CSLI  

Publications,  Stanford,  pp.  97-­‐134.  

Levin,   B.   &   Rappaport   Hovav,  M.   (2005),  Argument  Realization,   Cambridge   University  

Press,  Cambridge.    

Malchukov,  A.  &  Ogawa,  A.  (2011),  “Towards  a  typology  of  impersonal  constructions.  A  

semantic   map   approach”,   in   Impersonal   Constructions.   A   cross-­‐linguistic  

perspective,   A.   Malchekov   &   A.   Siewierska   (eds),   John   Benjamins,   Amsterdam-­‐

Philadelphia.  

Miller,   G.   A.   (1990),   “WordNet:   An   On-­‐line   Lexical   Database”,   International   Journal   of  

Lexicographic  3(4),  pp.  235-­‐312.      

Matthews,   P.   H.   (1997(2007)),   The   Concise   Oxford   Dictionary   of   Linguistics,   Oxford  

University  Press,  Oxford.  

Moretti,  G.  B.  &  Orvieto,  G.  R.  (1983),  Grammatica  Italiana,  vol.  III,  Il  Verbo:  morfologia  e  

note  generali  di  sintassi,  Benucci,  Perugia.    

Moro,   A.   (2006),   I   confini   di   Babele.   Il   cervello   e   il   mistero   delle   lingue   impossibili,  

Longanesi,  Milano.  

Moro,  A.  (2012),  Parlo  dunque  sono,  Adelphi  Edizioni  SPA,  Milano.  

Olbertz,   H.,   Hengeveld,   K.,   Garcia,   J.   S.   (eds.)   (1998),   The   Structure   of   the   Lexicon   in  

Functional  Grammar,  John  Benjamins,  Amsterdam-­‐Philadelphia.    

Palmer,   M.,   Gildea   D.   &   Kingsbury,   P.   (2005),   “The   Proposition   Bank:   A   Corpus  

Annotated  with  Semantic  Roles”,  Computational  Linguistics  31(1),  pp.  71-­‐106.  

Piñón,  C.  (2001),  “A  finer  look  at  the  causative-­‐inchoative  alternation”,  in  Proceedings  of  

Semantics   and   Linguistic   Theory   11,   R.   Hastings,   B.   Jackson   and   Z.   Zvolensky  

(eds.),  CLC  Publications,  Cornell  University,  Ithaca,  New  York.  

Page 113: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  113  

Porzig,  W.  (1934),  “Wesenhafte  Bedeutungsbeziehungen”,  in  Beitrage  zur  Geschichte  der  

deutschen  Sprache  und  Literatur,  58,  pp.  70-­‐97.  

Plato  (1921),  Plato  in  Twelve  Volumes,  Vol.  12,   translated  by  Harold  N.  Fowler,  Harvard  

University  Press,  Cambridge  Mass.;  William  Heinemann  Ltd,  London.  

Pustejovsky,  J.  (1995),  The  Generative  Lexicon,  The  MIT  Press,  Cambridge  Mass.  

Rappaport   Hovav,   M.   &   Levin,   B.   (2002),   “Change   of   State   Verbs:   Implications   for  

Theories  of  Argument  Projection”,  BLS  28,  Berkeley  Linguistics  Society,  Berkeley,  

pp.  269-­‐280.  

Ravin,  Y.  (1990),  Lexical  Semantics  without  Thematic  Roles,  Clarendon  Press,  Oxford.  

Ramchand,   G.   &   Reiss,   C.   (eds.)   (2007),   The   Oxford   Handbook   of   Linguistic   Interfaces,  

Oxford  University  Press,  Oxford.          

Robins,  R.  H.  (1967),  A  Short  History  of  Linguistics,  Longman,  London.    

Roland,  D.  &  Jurafsky,  D.  (2002),  “Verb  sense  and  verb  subcategorization  probabilities”,  

in   The   Lexical   Basis   of   Sentence   Processing:   Formal,   Computational,   and  

Experimental   Issues,   S.   Stevenson   and   P.   Merlo   (eds.),   John   Benjamins,  

Amsterdam,  pp.  325-­‐346.  

Salvi,   G.,   Renzi,   L.   &   Cardinaletti,   A.   (1988)   (eds.),   Grande   Grammatica   Italiana   di  

consultazione,   Vol.   I:   La   Frase.   I   Sintagmi   Nominale   e   Preposizionale,   Il   Mulino,  

Bologna.    

Salvi,   G.,   Renzi,   L.   &   Cardinaletti,   A.   (1991)   (eds.),   Grande   Grammatica   Italiana   di  

consultazione,   Vol.   II:   I   Sintagmi   Verbale,   Aggettivale,   Avverbiale.   La  

Subordinazione,  Il  Mulino,  Bologna.  

Salkoff,  M.  (1983),  “Bees  are  swarming  in  the  garden”,  Language  59.2,  pp.  288-­‐346.  

Schäfer,  F.   (2009),   “The  Causative  Alternation”,  Language  and  Linguistics  Compass  3/2,  

pp.  641–681.  

Schulte   im   Walde,   S.   (2009),   “The   Induction   of   Verb   Frames   and   Verb   Classes   from  

Corpora”,  in  Corpus  Linguistics.  An  International  Handbook,  A.  Lüdeling  &  M.  Kytö  

(eds.),  Mouton  de  Gruyter,  Berlin,  pp.  952-­‐972.  

Page 114: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  114  

Serianni,   L.   (1989   (2006),   Grammatica   italiana.   Italiano   commune   e   lingua   letteraria,  

UTET,  Torino.    

Steiner,   G.   (1975),  After  Babel:  Aspects  of  Language  and  Translation,   Oxford  University  

Press,  Oxford.    

Stowell,  T.  (1981),  Origins  of  Phrase  Structures,  Doctoral  Disseratation,  MIT,  Cambridge  

MA.  

Shi,   L.  &  Mihalcea,  R.   (2005),   “Putting  Pieces  Together:  Combining  FrameNet,  VerbNet  

and   WordNet   for   Robust   Semantic   Parsing”,   in   Proceedings   of   the   Sixth  

International   Conference   on   Intelligent   Text   Processing   and   Computational  

Linguistics,  Mexico  City.    

Swier,  R.  &  Stevenson,  S.  (2004),  “Unsupervised  Semantic  Role  Labelling”,  in  Proceedings  

of   the   2004   Conference   on   Empirical   Methods   in   Natural   Language   Processing,  

Barcelona,  Spain,  pp.  95-­‐102.    

Swift,   M.   (2005),   “Toward   Automatic   Acquisition   from   VerbNet   for   Spoken   Dialog  

Processing”,  in  Proceedings  of  Interdisciplinary  Workshop  on  the  Identification  and  

Representation  of  Verb  Features  and  Verb  Classes,  Saarbrücken,  Germany.        

Talmy,   L.   (1985),   “Lexicalization   Patterns:   Semantic   Structure   in   Lexical   Forms”,   in  

Language  Typology  and  Syntactic  Description  3:  Grammatical  Categories  and   the  

Lexicon,  T.  Shopen  (ed.),  Cambridge  University  Press,  Cambridge,  pp.  57-­‐149.    

Talmy,   L.   (1991),   “Path   to   Realization   –   Via   Aspect   and   Result”,   BLS   17,   Berkeley  

Linguistics  Society,  Berkeley,  pp.  480-­‐519.    

Tesnière,  L.  (1959),  Eléments  de  Syntaxe  Structurale,  Libraire  C.  Klincksieck,  Paris.  

van  Valin,  R.  &  Foley,  W.  (1984),  “Role  and  Reference  Grammar”  in  Syntax  and  Semantics,  

vol.  XIII:  Current  Approaches  to  Syntax,   E.  Moravcsik  &   J.  Wirth   (eds.),  Academic  

Press,  New  York.  

Van  Valin,  R.  &  La  Polla,  R.  J.  (1997),  Syntax:  Structure,  Meaning  and  Function,  Cambridge  

University  Press,  Cambridge.  

Vendler,   Z.   (1957),   “Verbs   and   Time”,   in   Linguistics   in  Philosophy,   pp.   97-­‐121,   Cornell  

University  Press,  Ithaca.  

Page 115: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  115  

Vossen,   P.   (1995),   Grammatical   and   Conceptual   Individuation   in   the   Lexicon,   IFOTT,  

Amsterdam.    

Yi,  S-­‐t.,  Loper,  E.  &  Palmer,  M.  (2007),  “Can  Semantic  Roles  Generalize  Across  Genres?”,  

in  Proceedings  of  HLT/NAACL-­‐2007,  Rochester,  NY,  USA.  

XTAG   Research   Group   (2001),   “A   Lexicalized   tree   adjoining   grammar   for   English”,  

Technical  Report,  University  of  Pennsylvania.    

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Page 116: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  116  

APPENDIXES  

 APPENDIX  A  –  List  of  Subcategorisation  Frames  in  Il  Sabatini  &  Coletti  (2012)  

   

Subcategorisation  Frames    

 Explanation  

 Example  

 1)  Sogg-­‐V  

 Intransitive  monovalent  verb  

1.  Perché  tu  tremi?  “Why  are  you  shaking?”    2.  La  situazione  sta  precipitando  “The  situation  is  degenerating”  

 2)  Sogg-­‐V-­‐Arg  

 Transitive  bivalent  verb  

1.  Domani  mi  chiameresti?  “Would  you  call  me  tomorrow?”    2.  Io  ignoro  tutto  di  lui  “I  ignore  everything  about  him”    

 3)  Sogg-­‐V-­‐Arg+Comp.Pred  

 Transitive  bivalent  verb  with  a  predicative  complement  

1.  Ti  giudicavo  più  saggio  “I  judged  you  wiser”    2.  Vi  credevo  sinceri  “I  considered  you  honest”  

 4)  Sogg-­‐V-­‐Arg-­‐Prep.Arg  

 Transitive  trivalent  verb  with  a  prepositional  phrase  

1.  Daro  un  libro  al  mio  amico  “I  will  give  a  book  to  my  friend”    2.  Ho  mostrato  il  biglietto  al  controllare  “I  have  shown  the  ticket  to  the  controller”  

 5)  Sogg-­‐V-­‐Arg-­‐Prep.Arg-­‐Prep.Arg  

 Transitive  quadrivalent  verb  with  two  prepositional  phrases    

1.  Hanno  spostato  la  sede  da  Milano  a  Torino  “They  have  moved  the  headquarter  from  Milan  to  Turin    2.  Mia  madre  ha  tradotto  un  romanzo  dal  turco  all’inglese  “My  mum  translated  a  novel  from  Turkish  into  English    

 6)  Sogg-­‐V-­‐Comp.Pred  

 Intransitive  verb  with  a  predicative  complement    

1.  Sono  arrivato  primo  “I  have  ranked  first”    2.  I  nostri  accordi  rimangono  chiari  “Our  agreements  remain  clear”  

 7)  Sogg-­‐V-­‐Comp.Pred-­‐Prep.Arg  

Intransitive  bivalent  verb  with  a  prepositional  phrase  and  a  predicative  complement  

1.  Mario  ci  sembra  stanco  “Mario  seems  tired  to  us”      2.  L’affare  ci  parve  una  frode  “The  affair  appeared  like  a  fraud  to  us”  

Page 117: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  117  

 8)  Sogg-­‐V-­‐Prep.Arg  

 Intransitive  bivalent  verb  with  a  prepositional  phrase  

1.  Gianluca  crede  a  Babbo  Natale  “Gianluca  believes  in  Santa  Claus”    2.  Oggi  resto  in  ufficio    “Today  I  will  stay  in  the  office”  

 9)  Sogg-­‐V-­‐Prep.Arg-­‐Prep.Arg  

 Intransitive  trivalent  verb  with  two  prepositional  phrases  

1.  Questo  treno  va  da  Milano  a  Roma  “This  train  goes  from  Milan  to  Rome”    2.  Raccontaci  del  tuo  ultimo  viaggio  “Tell  us  about  your  last  trip”  

 10)  Non.Sogg-­‐V    

 Impersonal  avalent  verb  

1.  Piove  forte  “It  rains  heavily”    2.  Sta  tuonando  “It  is  thundering”  

 11)  Non.Sogg-­‐V-­‐Prep.Arg  

 Impersonal  monovalent  verb  with  a  prepositional  phrase  

1.  Ci  sembrava  di  impazzire  “It  seemed  to  us  to  go  crazy”    2.  Pare  che  i  lavori  siano  terminate  “It  appears  that  the  works  have  finished”  

   APPENDIX  B  –  List  of  the  1000  Top  Frequent  Italian  Verbs  Analysed  in  our  Sample  

(see  CD-­‐ROM)    

                                     

Page 118: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  118  

APPENDIX   C   –   List   of   Subcategorisation   Frames   identified   in   the   annotation  

procedure    

 Frame  

 

 Example  

NP_subj#V-­‐si#{affinché}fin   Si  è  sacrificato  affinché  studiassimo  “He  sacrificed-­‐pron  so  that  we  could  study”  

NP_subj#V-­‐ne#{a}PP   Gliene  voglio  perché  non  mi  ha  detto  la  verità  “I  bear  him  a  grudge  because  he  didn’t  tell  me  the  truth”  

NP_subj{che}fin#V#{da}PP   Da  ciò  consegue  che  non  e  possibile  partire  “From  this  it  follows  that  it  is  not  possible  to  leave”  

NP_subj#V-­‐sene#{...}PP   Se  ne  restò  a  casa/sulla  montagna/in  classe  “He  stayed  at  home/on  the  mountain/in  class”  

NP_subj#V-­‐si#{in}inf   Devi  limitarti  nel  mangiare  “You  have  to  limit-­‐pron  in  eating”  

NP_subj#V#{per}inf   Ha  insistito  per  avere  un  colloquio    “He  insisted  to  have  an  interview”  

NP_subj{0}inf#V#NP_obj   Sapere  che  sei  malato  ci  affligge  “To  know  that  you  are  ill  afflicts  us”  

NP_subj#V#{a}inf   Mio  nipote  ha  imparato  a  camminare  “My  niece  learnt  to  walk”  

NP_subj#V#{di}PP#{a}PP   Hanno  domandato  di  te  alla  mamma  “They  asked  about  you  to  mum”  

NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{da}PP   Hanno  espulso  alcuni  studenti  da  scuola  “They  expelled  some  students  from  school”  

NP_subj#V#{con}PP#{...}PP   Non  consento  con  te  riguardo  la  vendita  della  casa  “I  don’t  agree  with  you  in  relation  to  the  selling  of  the  house”  

NP_subj#V-­‐si#{come}fin   Non  mi  spiego  come  tu  sia  bocciato  “I  don’t  explain-­‐pron  how  you  failed  the  exam”  

NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{di}PP   Mia  nonna  ci  fornisce  di  molte  provviste    “Our  grandmother  provides  us  of  many  supplies”  

NP_subj#V-­‐ci#{per}inf   Ci  vuole  pazienza  con  i  bambini  “There  needs-­‐pron  patience  with  children”  

NP_subj#V#NP_obj+Poss     La  situazione  impedisce  la  realizzazione  del  progetto  “The  situation  prevents  the  realisation  of  the  project”  

NP_subj#V#{fra}PP   Maria  oscilla  ancora  fra  le  due  possibilità  “Maria  still  swings  between  the  two  possibilities”  

NP_subj#V#{di}PP#{per}inf   Luca  approfitta  sempre  di  sua  madre  per  rimediare  un  passaggio  “Luca  always  takes  advantage  of  his  mother  to  get  a  lift”  

NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{per}PP   Prepara  lo  zaino  per  la  palestra,  Daniele!  Prepare  the  bag  for  the  gym,  Daniele!  

NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{in}PP   Mi  hanno  introdotto  subito  nel  nuovo  ambiente  di  lavoro  “They  immediately  introduced  me  into  the  new  work  environment”  

NP_subj{di}inf#V#{a}PP   Ti  importa  di  fare  una  brutta  figura?  “Of  looking  foolish  matters  to  you?”  

NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{a}inf   Ti  hanno  autorizzato  a  rispondere  alle  telefonate?  “Did  they  authorise  you  to  take  the  phone  calls?”  

NP_subj#V#{per}PP   Gianna  è  impazzita  per  la  morte  della  madre  “Gianna  got  mad  for  the  death  of  her  mother”  

Page 119: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  119  

NP_subj{0}inf#V   “Affligge  sapere  che  l’azienda  sta  fallendo”  “It  upsets  (to)  know  that  the  business  is  collapsing”  

NP_subj#V#Cpred   Flora  ha  debuttato  come  attrice  “Flora  debuted  as  actress”  

NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{su}PP   Basi  sempre  le  tue  opinioni  sulle  parole  di  altri?  “Do  you  always  base  your  opinions  on  somebody  else’s  words?”  

NP_subj#V#{su}PP#{per}PP   I  miei  capi  premono  su  di  me  per  un  veloce  miglioramento  “My  bosses  pressures  on  me  for  a  quick  improvement”  

NP_subj#V#{a}PP#{...}PP   Questi  soldi  bastano  a  tutti  voi  fino  a  fine  mese  “This  money  is  enough  for  all  of  you  until  the  end  of  the  month”  

Non-­‐NP_subj#Cpred   Sembra  estate  “It  seems  summer”  

Non-­‐NP_subj#V#{...}PP   Piove  in  casa/dentro  la  macchina  “It  rains  into  the  house/inside  the  car”  

NP_subj#V-­‐ci#NP_obj     Ci  ho  messo  due  ore  a  finire  i  compiti  “I  put-­‐pron  to  hours  to  finish  my  homework”  

NP_subj{0}inf#V#{...}PP   Imparare  l’inglese  ti  servira’    “(To)  learn  English  will  be-­‐pron  useful  to  you”  

NP_subj#V#NP_obj   Il  generale  ha  condotto  una  notevole  spedizione  “The  general  conducted  a  remarkable  campaign”  

NP_subj#V-­‐ci#{a}inf   Ci  vuole  poco  ingegno  a  capire  come  stanno  le  cose  “Little  intelligence  is  needed-­‐pron  to  understand  how  things  are”  

NP_subj{che}fin#V   Succede  che  qualcosa  vada  male  nella  vita  “It  happened  that  somebody  goes  wrong  in  life”  

NP_subj#V-­‐si#{davanti  a}PP   Non  mi  umilio  davanti  a  nessuno  “I  don’t  humiliate-­‐pron  before  anybody”  

NP_subj#V-­‐ci#{...}PP#{...}PP   Ci  corre  una  bella  differenza  tra  il  promettere  e  l’ottenere/dal  promettere  all’ottenere  “A  great  difference  stands-­‐pron  between  promising  and  obtaining/from  promising  to  obtaining”  

NP_subj#V#{in}PP   La  macchina  è  affondata  nella  neve  “The  car  sunk  in  the  snow”  

NP_subj#V#{di}inf   Finalmente  ho  capito  di  avere  bisogno  di  aiuto  “Finally  I’ve  understood  to  need  help”  

NP_subj#V-­‐si#{...}PP   I  manifestanti  si  stanno  raccogliendo  in  piazza/davanti  al  comune  “The  protesters  are  gathering-­‐pron  in  the  square/before  the  town  hall”    

Non-­‐NP_subj#V   Sta  piovendo  fortissimo  “It  is  raining  heavily”  

NP_subj#V#{su}PP#{per}inf   Il  mio  professore  preme  su  di  noi  per  fare  bella  figura  “The  professor  pushes  on  us  to  make  a  good  impression”  

NP_subj#V-­‐si#{di}inf   Vi  siete  proposti  di  pulire  il  giardino  “You  put  forward-­‐pron  to  clean  the  garden”  

NP_subj#V#{a}inf#{a}PP   La  maestra  ci  ha  insegnato  a  scrivere    “The  teacher  taught  us  to  write”  

NP_subj#V#{0}inf   Io  odio  stirare!  “I  hate  (to)  iron!”  

NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{che}fin   Scommetterei  i  miei  risparmi  che  non  si  laureerà  mai  “I  would  bet  my  savings  that  he  will  never  graduate”      

Page 120: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  120  

NP_subj#V#{da}PP#{...}PP   La  rondine  è  volata  dal  tetto  all’/sull’albero  “The  swallow  has  flown  from  the  roof  to/onto  the  tree”  

NP_subj#V#NP_obj     Mio  nonno  raccontava  storie  bellissime  “My  grandfather  told  beautiful  stories”  

NP_subj#V-­‐si#{su}PP   La  mia  idea  si  fonda  sulla  mia  personale  esperienza  “My  idea  based-­‐pron  on  my  personal  experience”  

NP_subj#V-­‐si    Ti  preoccupi  troppo  “You  worry-­‐pron  too  much”  

NP_subj#V#{da}PP   Il  sole  sorge  da  Ovest  “The  sun  rises  from  the  West”  

NP_subj#V-­‐si#NP_obj#{da}PP   Mi  sono  cavato  i  soldi  dalla  tasca!  “I  pulled-­‐pron  the  money  from  the  pocket!”  

NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{...}PP   Hai  lanciato  la  palla  sul  tetto/contro  la  macchina  “You  threw  the  ball  on  the  roof/against  the  car”  

NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{fra}PP   Lo  calcolo  fra  i  miei  migliori  amici  “I  count  him  among  my  best  friends”  

NP_subj#V-­‐si#{che}fin   Mi  attendevo  che  tu  intervenissi  “I  expected-­‐pron  that  you  intervened”  

NP_subj#V-­‐sela   Te  la  stai  proprio  godendo!  “You  are  really  enjoying-­‐pron!”  

NP_subj#V#{con}PP   Hai  litigato  di  nuovo  con  tuo  fratello?  “Have  you  fought  again  with  your  brother?”  

NP_subj#V-­‐si#Cpred_Adv   Comportatevi  bene  bambini!  Behave-­‐pron  properly  kids!  

NP_subj#V-­‐si#{a}PP   Si  richiamarono  al  simile  caso  dell’anno  scorso  “They  referred-­‐pron  to  the  similar  case  of  last  year”  

NP_subj#V#{...}inf   Il  filo  serve  a/per  cucire  “The  thread  is  necessary-­‐pron  to/for  knitting”  

NP_subj#V-­‐ci#{in}PP   Ci  vanno  due  uova  nella  ricetta  “There  go-­‐pron  two  eggs  in  the  recepy”  

NP_subj#V#{con}PP#{che}fin   Hanno  convenuto  con  noi  che  la  votazione  non  è  valida  “They  agreed  with  us  that  the  election  is  not  valid”  

NP_subj#V#{di}PP#{per}PP   Il  tuo  amico  approfitta  della  tua  disponibilità  per  i  suoi  interessi  “You  friend  takes  advantage  of  your  availability  for  his  own  interests”  

Non-­‐NP_subj#V-­‐cene#{di}PP   Ce  ne  vuole  di  pazienza!  “There  is-­‐pron  need  of  patience!”  

NP_subj#V#Cpred#{a}PP   Questa  notizia  mi  suona  strana  “This  piece  of  news  sounds  strange  to  me”  

NP_subj#V#NP_obj+Poss   I  miei  genitori  hanno  stabilito  le  regole  della  casa  “My  parents  established  the  rules  of  the  house”  

NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{da}PP#{...}PP   Gli  operai  hanno  scaricato  la  merce  dal  camion  in  cantina/al  primo  piano  “The  workers  have  unloaded  the  goods  from  the  lorry  into  the  cellar/to  the  first  floor”  

NP_subj#V-­‐si#{fra}PP   I  borsaioli  si  confusero  tra  i  passeggeri  del  tram  “The  pickpockets  mixed  up-­‐pron  among  the  passengers  of  the  tram”  

NP_subj#V#{in}inf   Ho  esitato  nello  scegliere  la  professione  “I  hesitated  in  choosing  my  job”  

NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{con}PP   Abbiamo  discusso  il  progetto  della  casa  con  l’ingegnere  “We  have  discussed  the  project  of  the  house  with  the  engineer”      

Page 121: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  121  

NP_subj#V#Cpred_Adv#{...}PP   L’errore  è  valso  da  monito  per/a  tutti  “The  mistake  functioned  as  warning  for/to  all  of  us”  

NP_subj#V-­‐si#{contro}PP   La  moto  si  è  schiacciata  contro  il  muretto  “The  motorbike  crashed-­‐pron  against  a  wall”  

NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{...}inf   Mi  hanno  accusato  di/per  aver  favorito  il  candidate  “They  accused  me  of/for  favouring  the  candidate”  

NP_subj#V#{come}fin#{a}PP   Mi  domandaste  come  facessi  ad  essere  sempre  felice  “You  asked  me  how  I  could  be  always  happy”  

NP_subj#V-­‐sela#{con}PP   Il  governo  dovrà  vedersela  con  il  deficit  “The  government  will  have  to  deal-­‐pron  with  the  deficit”  

NP_subj#V#{con}PP#{su}PP   Convengo  con  te  sull’urgenza  dei  provvedimenti  “I  agree  with  you  on  the  urgency  of  the  measurements”    

NP_subj#V-­‐si#{di}PP   Non  mi  sorprendo  più  di  niente  “I  am  not  surprised-­‐pron  of  anything  anymore”  

NP_subj#V-­‐la#{di}inf   Piantiamola  di  prenderci  in  giro  “Let’s  stop  of  fooling  ourselves!”      

NP_subj#V#Cpred_Adv   Questo  telefono  funziona  male  “This  phone  works  badly”  

NP_subj#V#{su}PP   La  cupola  pesa  su  possenti  colonne  “The  dome  weighs  on  the  mighty  columns”  

NP_subj#V#{che}fin#{a}PP   Mi  ha  raccontato  che  la  serata  non  e’  proseguita  bene  “She  told  (to)  me  that  the  night  didn’t  go  on  well”    

NP_subj#V-­‐sene#{di}PP   Se  ne  sbatte  di  tutti  “He  doesn’t  care  of  anyone”  

NP_subj#V-­‐si#{in}PP   Il  provvedimento  si  inquadra  in  un  vasto  piano  di  interventi  “The  measurement  is  placed-­‐pron  within  a  broad  plan  of  intervention”  

NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{a}PP   Ho  scritto  una  lettere  al  direttore  “I  wrote  a  letter  to  the  chief”  

NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{di}inf   Ho  avvisato  mio  padre  di  essere  in  ritardo  “I  have  told  my  father  to  be  late”  

NP_subj#V-­‐ci#{...}PP   Mi  ci  vorrebbe  un  po’  riposo    “A  little  rest  would  be-­‐pron  necessary  for  me”  

NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{per}inf   Ha  speso  tutti  i  suoi  risparmi  per  comprare  la  macchina  “He  spent  all  his  savings  to  buy  a  car”  

NP_subj#V-­‐si#{con}PP#{per}PP   Mi  compiaccio  con  te  per  l’esito  dell’esame  “I  congratulate-­‐pron  with  you  for  the  outcome  of  the  exam”  

NP_subj#V-­‐si#{per}inf   Mi  impegnerò  per  migliorare  “I  will  commit-­‐pron  to  improve”  

NP_subj#V-­‐si#Cpred   La  lana  si  è  mantenuta  morbida    “The  wool  maintained-­‐pron  soft”  

NP_subj#V#Cpred_Adv#{a}PP   La  ragazza  ci  servirà  come  segreteria    “The  girl  will  be  necessary  to  us  as  secretary”  

NP_subj#V-­‐si#{da}inf   Mi  guardo  sempre  dal  giudicare  gli  altri  “I  always  refrain-­‐pron  from  judging  other  people”  

NP_subj#V#{di}inf#Cpred   Lucia  ha  creduto  opportuno  agire  in  questo  modo  “Lucia  believed  opportune  (to)  act  in  this  manner”  

NP_subj#V#ger   Il  relatore  ha  esordito  cantando  “The  speaker  started  off  singing”  

NP_subj#V#{che}fin   Questo  dimostra  che  avevo  ragione  io  “This  proves  that  I  was  right”  

NP_subj#V#NP_obj#ger   Avete  occupato  spazio  inutilmente  sistemando  i  mobili  così    “You  took  up  space  in  vain  arranging  the  furniture  like  this”  

Page 122: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  122  

NP_subj#V-­‐ci   Lo  zio  non  ci  sente    “My  uncle  doesn’t  hear-­‐pron”    

NP_subj#V#{con}PP#{di}inf   Convennero  con  me  di  agire  segretamente  “They  agreed  with  me  to  act  secretly”  

NP_subj#V#{...}PP   La  serata  è  finita  a  casa  di  Marco/con  l’arrivo  dei  miei  genitori  “The  evening  ended  at  Marco’s  place/with  my  parents’  arrival”  

NP_subj#V#{a}PP#{di}PP   Narraci  del  tuo  ultimo  viaggio  “Tell  (to)  us  of  your  last  trip”  

NP_subj#V-­‐si#NP_obj#{con}PP   I  figli  si  contendono  l’azienda  con  il  padre  “The  sons  contend-­‐pron  the  business  with  the  father”  

NP_subj#V-­‐si#NP_obj#{...}PP   Non  coprirti  il  viso  con  le  mani!  “Don’t  cover-­‐pron  your  face  with  your  hands!”  

NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{contro}PP   Gli  indigeni  scagliavano  frecce  contro  i  bianchi  “Native  people  threw  arrows  against  white  people”  

NP_subj#V#NP_obj#Cpred   Ti  hanno  eletto  presidente  “They  have  elected  you  president”    

NP_subj{che}fin#V#{a}PP   Mi  risulta  che  tu  mi  abbia  cercato  “It  appears  to  me  that  you  have  looked  for  me”  

NP_subj#V#{contro}PP   La  barca  ha  sbattuto  contro  gli  scogli  “The  boat  slammed  against  the  cliffs”  

NP_subj#V#{da}PP#{a}PP   Il  mio  gatto  è  salito  dal  terrazzo  al  tetto  “My  cat  climbed  from  the  balcony  to  the  roof”  

NP_subj#V-­‐si#NP_obj#{a}PP   Si  puntò  la  rivoltella  alla  tempia  “He  pointed-­‐pron  the  gun  to  his  head”  

NP_subj{che}fin#V#NP_obj   Mi  stupisce  che  tu  non  ci  abbia  pensato  prima  “That  you  have  not  thought  about  it  before  surprises  (to)  me”  

NP_subj{di}inf#V   Accade  di  fare  tardi  la  sera  “It  happens  to  be  late  at  night”  

NP_subj#V   È  morto  mio  nonno  “My  grandfather  died”  

NP_subj#V-­‐si#NP_obj#Cpred   Ti  sei  dimenticato  di  nuovo  la  luce  accesa  “You  have  forgotten  the  light  on  once  again”  

NP_subj#V#{di}inf#{a}PP   Ti  suggerisco  di  andare  e  parlare  con  il  preside  “I  suggest  to  you  to  go  and  talk  to  the  principal”  

NP_subj#V-­‐sene#Cpred   Me  ne  sono  rimasto  tranquillo  “I  stayed-­‐pron  calm”  

NP_subj#V-­‐si#{da}PP#{...}PP   Ci  siamo  spostati  dalla  cucina  alla  camera  “We  moved-­‐pron  from  the  kitchen  to  the  bedroom”  

NP_subj#V#{come}fin   Ho  notato  come  tu  ti  sia  arrabbiato  “I  noticed  how  you  got  angry”  

NP_subj#V#{che}fin#Cpred   Credo  appropriato  che  tu  gli  dica  la  verità  “I  believe  appropriate  that  you  tell  him  the  truth”  

NP_subj#V#NP_obj#Cpred_Adv   Mia  sorella  ha  un  dottore  per  marito  “My  sister  has  a  doctor  as  husband”  

NP_subj#V#{0}inf#Cpred   Giudico  corretto  avvisare  le  persone  per  tempo  “I  judge  honest  to  inform  people  in  advance”  

NP_subj#V#{che}fin#{da}PP   Da  quello  che  ha  detto  deduco  che  non  accetterà  la  proposta  “From  what  you  said  I  deduce  that  he  won’t  accept  the  offer”  

NP_subj#V-­‐si#{per}PP   Questo  romanzo  si  caratterizza  per  lo  stile  inconfondibile  “This  novel  characterises-­‐pron  for  the  unmistakable  style”    

Page 123: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  123  

NP_subj#V-­‐si#{a}inf   Ci  siamo  fermati  a  fare  benzina  “We  stopped-­‐pron  to  fill  the  tank”  

NP_subj#V-­‐si#{con}PP   L’automobile  si  è  scontrata  con  un  camion  “The  car  crashed-­‐pron  with  a  lorry”  

NP_subj#V-­‐la   Alla  fine  l’ho  spuntata!  “I  finally  made-­‐pron  it”  

NP_subj{che}fin#V#Cpred#{a}PP   Spetta  a  noi  fare  la  spesa  “It  is  up  to  us  to  do  the  food  shopping”  

NP_subj{0}inf#V#{a}PP   Spetta  a  noi  fare  la  spesa  “It  is  up  to  us  to  do  the  food  shopping”  

NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{addosso  a}PP   Gli  è  piombata  addosso  una  disgrazia  “A  disgrace  fell  onto  him”  

NP_subj{0}inf#V#Cpred#{a}PP   Ci  appare  scontato  rimandare  la  seduta  “Postponing  the  meeting  seems  granted  to  us”  

NP_subj#V-­‐si#{da}PP   Ti  sei  allontanato  dall’argomento  “You  moved-­‐pron  from  the  topic”  

NP_subj#V#{di}PP   Dubita  delle  tue  parole  “She  doubts  (of)  your  words”  

NP_subj#V-­‐si#NP_obj     Mi  sono  messo  il  cappotto  “I  put-­‐pron  the  coat  on”  

NP_subj#V#{a}PP   A  Mario  la  tua  offesa  brucia  ancora  “Your  insult  still  burns  to  Mario”  

NP_subj#V-­‐ne#{di}PP   Ne  va  della  nostra  immagine  “It  is  about  our  imagine”  

NP_subj#V-­‐sene   La  mia  memoria  se  ne  sta  andando  “My  memory  is  failing-­‐pron”  

NP_subj{di}PP#V   Si  tratta  del  nostro  futuro  “It  is  a  matter  of  our  future”  

NP_subj#V-­‐si#{0}inf   Mi  sono  lasciato  ingannare  “I  left  be-­‐pron  fooled”  

NP_subj{come}fin#V#{a}PP   Mi  dispiace  se  credi  che  io  abbia  approfittato  di  tuo  fratello  “If  you  believe  that  I  have  taken  advantage  of  your  brother  it  upsets  (to)  me”  

 

                               

Page 124: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  124  

APPENDIX  D  –  Argumental  Sentence  Alternations    a.  Alternations  involving  argumental  sentences  in  a  complement  position    

 Alternation  

 

 Example  

 Verbs  

 NP_subj#V#{che}fin#{a}PP  

/  NP_subj#V#{di}inf#{a}PP  

     

 

 1.  Ti  auguro  che  tutto  vada  bene  “I  wish  you  that  everything  go  well”    2.  Ti  auguro  di  fare  un  buon  viaggio  “I  wish  you  to  have  a  pleasant  journey”  

Augurare,   garantire,  ricordare,   assicurare,  promettere,   gridare,  confidare,   annunciare,  raccontare,   chiedere,  comandare,  raccomandare,   dire,  dichiarare,   permettere,  scrivere,   giurare,  confessare,   comunicare,  riferire  

 NP_subj#V#{che}fin  

/  NP_subj#V#{di}inf  

       

               

 1.   La   situazione   impone   che   tutti  partecipino  “The   situation   requires   that   everyone  get  involved”    2.  La  situazione  impone  di  essere  uniti  “The   situation   requires   to   stick  together”    

 

Ignorare,   disporre,  scoprire,   tacere,  imporre,   badare,  escludere,   vedere,  riscoprire,   protestare,  stabilire,   intuire,  gridare,   temere,  confidare,   sopportare,  constatare,   supporre,  tollerare,   annunciare,  pensare,   ammettere,  deliberare,   immaginare,  dubitare,   fingere,  sapere,   convenire,  ipotizzare,   nascondere,  smentire,   esigere,  ritenere,   sperare,  pretendere,   dire,  aspettare,   riconoscere,  dichiarare,   credere,  dimenticare,   sostenere,  aggiungere,   prescrivere,  ottenere,   decidere,  negare,   accettare,  dimostrare,   sognare,  testimoniare,  rivelare  

   

NP_subj#V#{che}fin  /  

NP_subj#V#{come}fin  

1)   La   maestra   ha   notato   che   gli  studenti  erano  stanchi  “The  teacher  noticed  that  the  students  were-­‐indic  tired”    2)   La   maestra   ha   notato   come   gli  studenti  fossero  stanchi  “The  teacher  noticed  how  the  students  were-­‐subj  tired”  

 Provare,   sottolineare,  notare,   concepire,  ricordare,   vedere,  giudicare,   imparare,  sapere,   intendere,  stabilire,  prevedere  

Page 125: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  125  

 NP_subj#V#{che}fin#{a}PP  

/  NP_subj#V#{come}fin#{a}PP

}PP  

 1)   Il   poliziotto   ha   spiegato   agli  studenti  che  l’autocontrollo  è  vitale  “The   policeman   has   explained   that  self-­‐control  is  vital  to  the  students”    2)   Il   poliziotto   ha   spiegato   agli  studenti  come  l’autocontrollo  sia  vitale  agli  “The   policeman   has   explained   how  self-­‐control  be-­‐subj  vital  to  the  students”    

 Spiegare,  mostrare  

 NP_subj#V-­‐si#{che}fin  

/  NP_subj#V-­‐si#{di}inf  

 1)  Il  calciatore  si  dispiace  di  aver  perso    “The  footballer  is  sorry  to  have  lost”    2)   Il   calciatore   si   dispiace   che   la  squadra  abbia  perso  “The   footballer   is   sorry   that   the   team  lost-­‐subj”  

 

 Convincersi,   augurarsi,  assicurarsi,   illudersi,  ricordarsi,   sorprendersi,  immaginarsi,  dispiacersi,   attendersi,  accorgersi,  sognarsi  

 NP_subj#V#{come}fin#{a}PP  

/  NP_subj#V-­‐si#{come}finPP  

 1)  Ti  spiego  come  si  fa  “I  will  explain  to  you  how  it  is  done”      2)Ora   mi   spiego   come   mai   non   mi  saluta  “Now   I   explain  myself  how  he  doesn’t  say  hi  to  me”    

Spiegare,  domandare  

 NP_subj#V#{di}inf#{a}PP  

/  NP_subj#V-­‐si#{di}infPP  

 1)  Permettere  al  figlio  di  uscire  “To  let  one’s  son  to  go  out”    2)   Si   può   permettere   di   andare   in  vacanza  dove  vuole  “She   can   afford   to   go   on   holiday  wherever  she  wants”    

 Proporre,   permettere,  imporre,   augurare,  assicurare,   offrire,  ricordare,   impedire,  rimproverare,  risparmiare  

 2.  Alternations  involving  argumental  sentences  in  the  subject  position    

 NP_subj{che}fin#V  

/  NP_subj{di}inf#V  

 1)   Pare   che   nessun   risultato   sia  ottenibile    “Seems-­‐impers   that   no   result   is  achievable”    1)  Pare  di  non  ottenere  nessun  risultato  “Seems-­‐impers  to  not  achieve  any  results”      

 Sembrare,   parere,  accadere  

Page 126: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  126  

 NP_subj{0}inf#V  

/  NP_subj{che}fin#V  

 1)  Bisogna  raccogliere  i  soldi  “Needs-­‐imper  to  collect  the  money”    2)  Bisogna  che  i  soldi  siano  raccolti  “Needs-­‐imper  that  the  money  be  collected”  

 Occorrere,  bisognare  

 

 NP_subj{0}inf#V#{a}PP  

/  NP_subj{che}fin#V#{a}PP  

 1)  A  noi  conviene  che  tu  parta  subito      “To   us   mattersimper   that   you   leavesubj  immediately”    2)  A  noi  conviene  partire  subito    “To  us  mattersimper  to  leave  immediately”  

 Dispiacere,   convenire,  risultare  

                                                                                 

Page 127: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  127  

APPENDIX  E  –  Alternations  involving  Noun  or  Prepositional  Phrases  (NP  or  PP)      a.  Alternations  causing  a  change  in  the  transitivity  of  the  verbs    

 Alternation  

 

 Example  

 Verbs  

 NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{da}PP  

/  NP_subj#V-­‐si#{da}PP  

1)Hai  buttato  i  sassi  dalla  finestra  “You  threw  stones  from  the  window”    2)  Lui  si  è  buttato  dal  trampolino  “He  jumped-­‐pron  from  the  trampoline”    

Rilanciare,   buttare,  escludere,   difendere,   gettare,  dividere,   staccare,   spostare,  lanciare,   sciogliere,  allontanare,   sollevare,  distrarre,   trarre,   ritirare,  levare,   sfilare,   separare,  liberare,   ritrarre,   riparare,  salvare  

 NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{di}PP    

/    NP_subj#V-­‐si#{di}PP  

1)  Convincere  i  colleghi  della  validità  della  teoria  “To  convince  the  colleagues  of  the  validity  of  the  theory”    2)  Mi  sono  convinto  del  mio  errore  “I  convinced-­‐pron  of  my  mistake”    

Convincere,   privare,   fornire,  ricoprire,   riempire,   caricare,  svuotare,   dotare,   investire,  colmare,   incaricare,  circondare,  coprire  

 NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{a}PP  

/  NP_subj#V-­‐si#{a}PP  

1)  Ha  abituato  i  figli  allo  studio  “She  accustomed  the  children  to  studying”    2)  Si  sono  abituati  a  una  nuova  vita  “They  have  accustomed-­‐pron  to  a  new  life”      

Disporre,   affidare,   donare,  mostrare,  alternare,  opporre,  adattare,   abituare,  mescolare,   affiancare,  costringere,   agganciare,  esporre,   consacrare,  adeguare,   accordare,   unire,  iscrivere,   preparare,  sottrarre,   paragonare,  attaccare,   raccomandare,  presentare,   votare,  appassionare,   associare,  allineare,   vendere,  avvicinare,   indirizzare,  dichiarare,  dare,  predisporre,  sommare,   sottoporre,  accostare,   concedere,  rivolgere,   consegnare,  interessare,  dedicare  

   NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{in}PP    

/    NP_subj#V-­‐si#{in}PP  

1)  Il  provvedimento  ha  integrato  i  portatori  di  handicap  nella  società  “The  measurement  has  integrated  disabled  people  within  society”    2)  Mi  sono  integrato  nel  nuovo  ambiente  di  lavoro  “I  have  integrated-­‐pron  in  the  new  workplace”    

Proiettare,   integrare,  immergere,   situare,  rinchiudere,   specializzare,  inserire,   inquadrare,  trasformare  

Page 128: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  128  

 NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{su}PP  

/    NP_subj#V-­‐si#{su}PP  

1)  Hanno  basato  i  calcoli  sui  dati  ufficiali  “They  based  the  evaluations  on  official  data”    2)  L’accusa  si  basa  sulle  testimonianze  “The  prosecution  bases  itself  on  the  depositions”    

Fondare,   proiettare,   basare,  concentrare  

 NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{con}PP  

/  NP_subj#V-­‐si#{con}PP  

1)  I  contadini  scambiano  grano  con  petrolio    “Farmers  swap  wheat  with  petrol”        2)Mi  sono  scambiato  con  il  compagno  di  banco  “I  swapped-­‐pron  with  my  deskmate”    

Conciliare,   combinare,  alternare,   scambiare,  confrontare,  mescolare  

                           

NP_subj#V#NP_obj    /    

NP_subj#V-­‐si  

 I.  DIRECT  REFLEXIVES:    1)  Spesso  i  miei  genitori  giustificano  mia  sorella  “Often  my  parents  justify  my  sister    2)  Spesso  si  giustifica    “Often  he  justifies-­‐pron      

Isolare,   lavare,   rinnovare,  liberare,  negare,  allontanare,  scoprire,   schierare,  esprimere,   giustificare,  assicurare,   uccidere,  ammazzare,   allenare,  licenziare,   accettare,  consolare,   contraddire,  tormentare,   interrogare,  valorizzare,   ferire,   escludere,  spiegare,   umiliare,  nascondere  

 II.  RECIPROCAL  REFLEXIVES:    1)   Ho   incontrato   Luca   tanto  tempo  fa  “I  met  Luca  a  long  time  ago”    2)  Ci  siamo  incontrati  tanto  tempo  fa  “We  met-­‐pron  a  long  time  ago”    

Conoscere,   sospettare,  rispettare,   combattere,  fronteggiare,   controllare,  attirare,   ritrovare,   rivedere,  stimare,  sfidare,  abbracciare,  rincorrere,   inseguire,  sfiorare,   scegliere,   dividere,  stringere,   picchiare,  disturbare,   odiare,  respingere,   frequentare,  temere,   incontrare,   sposare,  vedere,   trovare,   baciare,  soccorrere  

 III.   CAUSATIVE-­‐INCOHATIVE  ALTERNATION:    1)  Lucia  ha  spezzato  un  biscotto  “Lucia  broke  a  biscuit”    2)  La  corda  si  è  spezzata  “The  rope  has  broken-­‐pron”      

Chiudere,   spaventare,  confondere,   emozionare,  abbassare,   restringere,  staccare,   ridurre,   intrecciare,  sbloccare,   scatenare,  rovinare,   turbare,   piegare,  conservare,   spezzare,  spaccare,  rompere  

Page 129: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  129  

                               

 NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{...}PP    

/    NP_subj#V-­‐si#{...}PP  

 

I.  DIRECT  REFLEXIVES:    1)  I  fondatori  hanno  stabilito  la  sede  dell’azienda  a  Roma  /  nella  capitale  “The  founders  have  established  the  headquarters  of  the  business  in  Rome  /  in  the  capital”    2)  Ho  deciso  di  stabilirmi  a  Milano  “I  have  decided  to  establish-­‐pron  in  Milan”    

Girare,   disporre,   calare,  orientare,   buttare,   muovere,  trascinare,   gettare,   voltare,  rilanciare,   avviare,   spingere,  stabilire,   spostare,   lanciare,  dirigere,   piazzare,   sistemare,  ambientare,   stendere,   mettere,  rivolgere,   abbandonare,   porre,  informare,  accordare    

II.  CAUSATIVE-­‐INCOHATIVE  ALTERNATION:    1)  Ho  rovesciato  la  minestra  sul  tappeto  “I  spilt  the  soup  on  the  carpet”      2)  Il  latte  si  è  rovesciato  per  terra  “The  milk  spilt-­‐pron  onto  the  floor”    

Infilare,   collocare,   versare,  aggiungere,   aprire,   insinuare,  avvolgere,   rovesciare,   spargere,  imprimere,  stampare  

III.  INTENSIVE  REFLEXIVES:    (1)  Fissa  sempre  lo  sguardo  sulla  mia  ragazza  “He  always  fixes  his  gaze  on  my  girlfriend”    (2)  Si  è  fissato  con  quella  ragazza  /  in  un  progetto  “He  fixed-­‐pron  with  that  girl  /  in  a  project”  

Fissare  

 b.  Alternations  involving  two  intransitive  variants    

 NP_subj#V    

/    NP_subj#V#{...}PP  

 1)  Nel  dopoguerra,  molti  furono  costretti  ad  emigrare  “During  the  post-­‐war  period  many  people  were  forced  to  emigrate”    2)  I  miei  nonni  emigrarono  in  Germania  “My  grandparents  emigrated  to  Germany”    

Tornare,   girare,   correre,  giocare,  finire,  accorrere,  uscire,  battere,   emigrare,   terminare,  perdere,   bastare,   combattere,  risalire,   arrivare,   durare,  oscillare,   riuscire,   volare,  nascere,   giungere,   ricadere,  cadere,   scivolare,   avanzare,  votare,   venire,   crescere,  piombare,   sorgere,   comparire,  reagire,   saltare,   slittare,  lavorare,   picchiare,   salire,  vagare,  precipitare,  rientrare  

Page 130: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  130  

APPENDIX   F   –   Alternations   involving   an   argumental   sentence   and   a   phrase  

complement  (NP  or  NP)    a.  Alternations  affecting  a  complement  position    

 Alternation  

 

 Example  

 Verbs  

 NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{a}PP  

/  NP_subj#V#{di}inf#{a}PP  

 1)   Ordinò   una  marcia   forzata  ai  soldati    “He  ordered  a  forced  march  to  the  soldiers”    2)   Ordinò   agli   studenti   di  preparare   il   testo   entro   una  settimana  “She   ordered   to   prepare   the  text   within   a   week   to   the  students”    

Rimproverare,   imporre,  risparmiare,   garantire,  ricordare,   giurare,   promettere,  gridare,   proporre,   ordinare,  confidare,   proibire,  annunciare,   raccontare,  chiedere,   augurare,  comandare,   offrire,  raccomandare,   sussurrare,  dire,   predicare,   vietare,  dichiarare,   permettere,  suggerire,  denunciare,  scrivere,  assicurare,   confessare,  concedere,   comunicare,  consigliare,  riferire,  impedire  

 NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{a}PP  

/  NP_subj#V#{che}fin#{a}PP  

 1)  Ho  promesso  aiuto  a  un  compagno  “I  promised  help  to  a  friend”    2)  Ti  prometto  che  arriverò  in  orario  “I  promise  you  that  I  will  arrive  on  time  

Augurare,  mostrare,   garantire,  ricordare,   assicurare,  promettere,   gridare,   confidare,  ripetere,   annunciare,  raccontare,   chiedere,  comandare,   raccomandare,  dire,   dichiarare,   segnalare,  spiegare,   permettere,  denunciare,   proporre,   scrivere,  giurare,   confessare,   concedere,  insegnare,  comunicare,  riferire  

 

NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{a}PP    

/    

NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{a}inf  

 

1)  La  scuola  educa  i  giovani  al  rispetto  degli  altri    “School  educates  youngsters  to  the  respect  for  others”    2)Educate  vostro  figlio  a  essere  tollerante  “Educate  your  son  to  be  tolerant”    

Disporre,   autorizzare,   invitare,  stimolare,   abituare,   indurre,  motivare,   incoraggiare,  costringere,   condannare,  esercitare,   educare,  ammettere,  trattenere,  spedire,  sollecitare,   delegare,   forzare,  ridurre,   obbligare,   mettere,  destinare  

 NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{che}fin  

/  NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{di}PP  

1)  Hai  avvisato  i  parenti  della  partenza?  “Did  you  warn  the  parent  about  the  departure?”  2)  Ho  avvisato  tutti  che  la  lezione  è  sospesa  “I  have  warned  everybody  that  the  lesson  is  cancelled”  

Avvisare,  convincere  

Page 131: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  131  

 NP_subj#V#{a}PP    

/    NP_subj#V#{a}inf  

1)  Rinunciò  a  un  progetto  “I  gave  up  on  a  project”    2)  Rinunciò  a  partire  “She  gave  up  on  going  away”    

Contribuire,   arrivare,  rinunciare,   scappare,  pervenire,   provvedere,   giocare,  venire,  badare,  pensare,  tenere,  ritornare,   mirare,   aspirare,  concorrere,  tendere  

 NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{a}PP    

/    NP_subj#V-­‐si#{a}inf  

1)  Abbiamo  obbligato  il  nemico  alla  resa  “We  forced  the  enemy  to  defeat”    2)  Mi  sono  obbligato  a  finire  il  libro  entro  l’anno  “I  have  forced-­‐pron  to  finish  the  book  within  the  year”    

Disporre,   convincere,  costringere,   obbligare,  esercitare,   indurre,   abituare,  ridurre,  trattenere  

 

NP_subj#V#NP_obj#{per}PP    

/    

NP_subj#V-­‐si#{per}inf  

 

1)  Preparo  i  bambini  per  la  scuola  “I  prepare  the  kids  for  school”    2)Preparati  per  andare  a  cena  “Prepare-­‐pron  to  go  for  dinner”    

Preparare,  sacrificare  

 NP_subj#V-­‐si#{per}PP  

/    NP_subj#V-­‐si#{per}inf  

1)  Ci  organizziamo  per  un’escursione  “We  organise-­‐pron  for  a  field  trip”    2)  Organizzatevi  per  uscire  presto  il  mattino  “Organise-­‐pron  to  leave  early  in  the  morning”    

Organizzare,   preparare,  sacrificare  

 NP_subj#V-­‐si#{di}PP    

/    NP_subj#V-­‐si#{di}inf  

1)  Mi  sono  dimenticato  del  tuo  compleanno  “I  have  forgotten  (of)  your  birthday”    2)  Mi  dimenticavo  di  farti  gli  auguri  “I  forgot-­‐pron  to  wish  you  happy  birthday”    

Curare,   convincere,   accusare,  assicurare,   pentirsi,  sorprendere,   occupare,   stupire,  ricordare,   accontentare,  dimenticare,   incaricare,  accorgersi,  vantare  

 NP_subj#V-­‐si#{che}fin    

/    NP_subj#V-­‐si#{di}PP  

1)  Ci  assicureremo  della  verità  delle  affermazioni  “We  will  verify-­‐pron  the  truth  of  the  statements”    2)  Ti  assicuri  che  tutto  sia  in  ordine?  “Will  you  verify-­‐pron  that  everything  is  in  order?”    

Convincere,   stupire,  assicurare,  ricordare,   sorprendere,  accorgersi  

Page 132: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  132  

 NP_subj#V-­‐si#{a}PP    

/    NP_subj#V-­‐si#{a}inf  

1)  Non  mi  presterei  mai  a  queste  cose  “I  would  never  lend-­‐pron  to  these  things”    2)  Ti  presteresti  a  sostenere  le  spese”  “Would  you  lend-­‐pron  to  support  the  expenses”    

Preparare,   rilanciare,  costringere,   determinare,  obbligare,   prestare,  rassegnare,   abbassare,  rimettere,   disporre,   adattare,  abituare,  ridurre,  indurre  

 b.  Alternations  taking  place  in  the  subject  position    

 NP_subj#V#{da}PP  

/    NP_subj{che}fin#V#{da}PP  

1)  Dalle  tue  parole  non  consegue  niente  di  buono  “From  your  words  nothing  good  follows”      2)  Da  ciò  consegue  che  non  è  possibile  partire  “From  this  follows-­‐impers  that  leaving  is  not  possible”    

Conseguire,  risultare  

 

NP_subj#V#{a}PP    

/    

NP_subj{che}fin#V#{a}PP  

 

1)  A  nessuno  importano  queste  sciocchezze!  “To  nobody  matter  these  silly  things!”    2)  Ai  ragazzi  importa  che  tu  sia  qui  con  noi    “To  the  guys  matters-­‐impers  that  you  are  here  with  us”    

Risultare,   capitare,   importare,  dispiacere,  sfuggire,  convenire  

 NP_subj#V#{a}PP    

/    NP_subj{0}inf#V#{a}PP  

1)  Mi  preme  solo  la  tua  felicità  “To  me  matters-­‐impers  only  your  happiness”    2)“A  noi  tutti  preme  essere  presenti”  “To  all  of  us  matters-­‐impers  be-­‐inf  present”    

Spettare,   risultare,   capitare,  dispiacere,  premere,  convenire  

 c.  Alternations  requiring  predicative  complements    

 NP_subj#V#NP_obj#Cpred    

/    NP_subj#V#{0}inf#Cpred  

1)  Vi  credevo  sinceri  “I  believed  you  sincere”    2)  Ho  creduto  opportuno  agire  in  questo  modo  “I  believed  right  act-­‐inf  in  this  way”    

Credere,  considerare,  giudicare  

Page 133: UNIVERSITA’ DI PISAcolinglab.humnet.unipi.it/.../masterThesis_VeronicaViola.pdf · 2013. 11. 28. · UNIVERSITA’ DI PISA Dipartimento di Filologia, Letteratura e Linguistica Corso

  133  

 

NP_subj#V#NP_obj#Cpred    

/    

NP_subj#V#{che}fin#Cpred  

 

1)  Lo  considero  il  miglior  giocatore  del  mondo  “I  consider  him  the  best  player  in  the  world”    2)  Considero  sconveniente  che  tu  rimanga  qui  “I  consider  inappropriate  that  you  remain  here”      

Credere,  considerare,  giudicare  

 

NP_subj#V#{0}inf#Cpred    

/    

NP_subj#V-­‐si#Cpred  

 

1)  Ho  giudicato  opportuno  agire  cosi  “I  judged  adequate  act-­‐inf  like  this”      2)  Si  giudica  furbo  “To  judge  oneself  smart”    

Credere,  considerare,  giudicare  

 

NP_subj#V#{che}fin#Cpred    

/    

NP_subj#V-­‐si#Cpred  

 

1)  Credo  giusto  che  tu  vada  in  persona  “I  believe  right  that  you  go  in  person”    2)  Mario  si  crede  il  più  bravo  di  tutti  “Mario  believes  himself  the  best”    

Credere,  considerare,  giudicare